WELCOME
450 Express Bridge
Congratulations on becoming the new owner of the
world’s most prestigious yacht. We at Sea Ray®
Boats, Inc. welcome you into our worldwide and ever-
expanding family of boating enthusiasts.
The Owner's Manual Packet, to be kept on board your
Sea Ray, gives you important information on all the
features of your Sea Ray, for years of trouble-free
boating take the time to carefully review the information
in your Owner's Manual Packet and really get to know
your boat. Have everyone who will operate your
yacht read this manual.
The Owner’s Manual Packet contains the following:
e Owner’s Manual
The Owner's Manual gives you important operating
and safety information, as well as reminding you about
your responsibilities as a boat owner/operator.
* Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
Information
This section of your Owner's Manual Packet contains
information from the manufacturers of equipment
installed on your boat. Examples include the engine,
engine control and steering system. Throughout the
Owners Manual you will be referred to information
provided by manufacturers of specific systems.
Because your purchase represents a substantial
investment, we know you will want to take the
necessary measures to protect its value. We have
outlined a program for proper operation, periodic
maintenance and safety inspections. We urge you to
follow these recommendations. If you have questions
which are not fully covered by the Owners Manual
Packet, please consult your authorized dealer for
assistance.
Thank You For Selecting A Sea Ray"!
Bon Voyage
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
INTRODUCTION
1. THis MANUAL
The material here and in the rest of the Owner’s Manual
Packet:
* (Gives you basic safety information;
e Describes the features of your boat;
e Describes the equipment on your boat;
e Describes the fundamentals of boat use; and
e (Contains service and maintenance information.
You must learn to operate this boat as well as read,
understand and use this manual.
What this manual does not give you is a course in
boating safety, or how to navigate, anchor or dock you
boat. Operating a power boat safely requires more
skills, knowledge and awareness than is necessary
for a car or truck.
2. YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES
For your safety, the safety of your passengers, other
boaters and people in the water, you must:
Take a boating safety course;
e Getinstruction in the safe and proper handling of
your boat;
* Understand and follow the “rules of the road”;
Learn how to navigate.
3. SOURCE OF INFORMATION
In North America, contact one of the following for
boating courses:
e U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary
о U.S. Power Squadron
* Canadian Power and Sail Squadrons
* Red cross
e State Boating Offices
e Yacht Club
Contact your dealer or the Boat/U.S. Foundation at
1-800-336-2628
Outside of North America, contact your boat dealer
and/or your governmental boating agency for
assistance.
A book that provides a comprehensive background in
boating is Chapman - Piloting, Seamanship and small
Boat handling, by Elbert S. Maloney, published by
Hearst Marine.
4. DEALER RESPONSIBILITIES
In addition to a pre-delivery check and service of the
boat, your dealer is to give you:
e A description and demonstration of the safety
systems, features, instruments and controls on
your boat;
e An orientation in the general operation of your
boat;
e An"In Service Form” completed by you and the
dealer after your inspection of the boat;
Areview of all warranty information and how to
obtain warranty service;
e The complete Owner’s Manual Packet.
If you do not receive all of these materials, or have any
questions, contact your dealer or call 1-800-SRBOATS
(International 1-314-216-3333).
5. WARRANTIES
Your boat comes with several warranties. Each
component and/or system on your boat has its own
warranty that will be found with the specific information
and manual for that component. These are included
with your Owner’s Manual Packet. Locate and read
the individual warranties; then put them together for
easy future reference. The Sea Ray® warranty is on
the warranty information card in your packet and is
repeated on the next page.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6. HULL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(HIN)
The “Hull Identification Number” located on the
starboard side of the transom, is the most important
identifying factor and must be included in all
correspondence and orders. Failure to include it
creates delays. Also of vital importance are the engine
serial numbers and part numbers when writing about
or ordering parts for your engine. Refer to the Engine
Operator’s Manual for locations of engine serial
numbers and record them for future reference.
H.I.N LOCATION
(FIG. 1V)
HULL
IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
7. MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION
As a boat manufacturer, Sea Ray builds their products
to guidelines established under the Federal Boat Safety
Act of 1971. The Act is promulgated by the United
States Coast Guard who has authority to enforce these
laws on boat manufacturers that sell products in the
United States.
Sea Ray ensures that all of its products comply with
these laws. The NMMA, National Marine Manufacturers
Association, provides Sea Ray with a third party
certification. The NMMA is an organization that
represents the marine industry and assists
manufacturers, boat dealers, marinas, repair yards
and component suppliers in areas of legislation,
environmental concerns, marine business growth and
state and federal government agency interaction. The
third party certification that Sea Ray participates in,
uses the well know Standards and Recommended
Practices of the ABYC, American Boat and Yacht
Council.
Sea Ray Boats participates extensively in the American
Boat and Yacht Council which is a non-profit
organization that develops and publishes voluntary
standards and recommended practices for boat and
equipment design, construction, service and repair.
We utilize all applicable ABYC standards in the
construction of your Sea Ray boat.
Finally, Sea Ray sells their products world wide and
as such must conform to the various rules and
regulations required by other countries. Most notably,
are the ISO standards in Europe which require the
application of the CE (Common European) mark. This
mark, much like the NMMA certification here in the US,
gives you the boat owner specific information
concerning your craft. For more information, turn to
Section 1 - Safety, subsections 8 and 12 which
explains in detail the CE plate and its importance.
8. SERVICE, PARTS AND REPAIR FOR
Y OUR BOAT
When your boat needs service, parts or repair, take it
to an authorized Sea Ray” dealer. To find a dealer in
your area call:
1-800-SRBOATS
Fax: 1-314-213-7878
(international 1-314-216-3333)
To find repair and parts facilities for the equipment
installed on your boat, refer to the manual for that
component.
If a problem is not handled to your satisfaction:
1. Discuss any warranty-related problems directly
with the service manager of the dealership or your
sales person. Give the dealer an opportunity to
help the service department resolve the matter
for you.
2. If a problem arises that has not been resolved to
your satisfaction by your dealer, contact Sea Ray®
Boats at 1-800-SRBOATS and the appropriate
customer service department information will be
provided to you.
IV
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
9. CONTACT PHONE NUMBERS &
INTERNET ADDRESSES
When your boat needs service, parts or repair, take it
to an authorized Sea Ray® dealer. To find a dealer in
your area call:
Sea Ray Boats USA
Phone …..….....…………....cccssrrrrreccc serrer ceene 1-800-SRBOATS
=) GE 1-314-213-7878
Internet cocci www.searay.com
Sea Ray Boats International ................ 1-314-216-3333
United States Coast Guard
Phone .......cooviiii i, 1-800-368-5647
Internet coo www.uscgboating.org
PhONE EEE 1-800-336-2628
Internet ...............————.—.—.—.—.—... www.boatus.com/foundation/
Phone EEE 1-800-267-6687
Internet .............————.... www.ccg.gcc.gc.ca/main_e.htm
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
Ro
ABOUT YOUR LIMITED WARRANTY
Sea Ray offers an express Limited Warranty on each new Sea Ray purchased through an authorized Sea Ray
dealer. A copy of the Limited Warranty was included in your owner’s packet. If for any reason, you did not
receive a copy of the Limited Warranty, please contact your local dealer or call 1-800 SR BOATS for a
replacement copy.
Under the Limited Warranty, Sea Ray covers structural fiberglass deck or hull defects which occur
with five (5) years of the date of delivery and parts founds to be defective in factory material or
workmanship within one (1) year of the date of delivery. In addition, laminate blisters resulting from
defects in factory material or workmanship are covered for five (5) years on a pro-rated basis.
Sea Ray’s obligation under the Limited Warranty is limited to repair or replacement of parts that are
judged defective by Sea Ray and does not include transportation, haul out, or other expenses. The
foregoing is the sole and exclusive remedy provided by Sea Ray.
The Limited Warranty does not cover engines, stern drives, controls, propellers, batteries, trailers,
or other equipment or accessories carrying their own individual warranties, nor does the Limited
Warranty cover engines, parts or accessories not installed by Sea Ray. The Limited Warranty does
not cover cosmetic gel coat finish. Boats used for commercial purpose are excluded from
coverage. See the Sea Ray Express Limited Transferable Warranty for other exclusions.
SEA RAY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS. NEITHER SEA RAY NOR THE SELLING DEALER SHALL HAVE ANY
RESPONSIBILITY FOR LOSS OF USE OF THE BOAT, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE,
COMMERCIAL LOSS OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
The unexpired term of the Limited Warranty may be transferred to a subsequent owner upon the new owner’s
written request to Sea Ray Division of Brunswick Corporation, 2600 Sea Ray Blvd., Knoxville, Tennessee,
37914 and payment to Sea Ray of Fifty Dollars ($50.00).
Thank you for your decision to buy a Sea Ray.
The Sea Ray Express Limited Transferable Warranty is subject to change at any time at Sea Ray’s discretion. The
information contained herein is general information about the Limited Warranty for the owner’s general knowledge,
but does not alter or amend the terms of the Limited Warranty.
Vi
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
450 EB OWNER’S MANUAL ® TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
1. ThisManual ...............coooiii en, ii
2. Your responsibilities ...........cc.cooiii A ii
3. Source of Information ..............ccoooii R KK ii
4. Dealer Responsibilities ..................—.....e.=eeeeeeeeee ii
S. Warranties ........coooviii re ii
6. Hull Identification Number (HIN) .............................. iv
7. Manufacturer’s Certificate iv
8. Service, Parts and repair for Your Boat .................... iv
9. Express Limited Transferable Warranty ..................... М
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
1.Safety Labels... K RER 1.1
2. Legally Mandated Minimum Reguired Equipment .... 1.
3. Fire Extinguishing Equipment ......................=........ 1.2
4, Carbon Monoxide ..................e..=.eeeeieeeeeeneeeeeeeeee 1.3
A. Carbon Monoxide Monitors ..................—..—.——.. 1.4
5. Life Saving Equipment ..............ccooo iii 1.4
A. PFD Classifications ere 1.4
6. Additional recommended Equipment for
Safe Operation …….…..…….…..….….……..…cssrrrecsereecssn eee 1.5
7.Impaired Operation …….…..…..…..…..….……….crrrrecseccenere 1.6
8. Load Capacity …....….....……....…ecrsrerraneree can sre rca nanee 1.6
A. United State are EEK 1.6
B.Inernational .................ccooii iii, 1.6
9. Power Capacity ......................ee.ieeriereecerre e. 1.7
10. Stability cessera ere ren cre ren rece 1.7
11. Maintain Control are 1.7
A. General Considerations .................—..——.......e...—.. 1.8
21.Weather.…...….......…...…..…….…rrrcrsrenereneea sera se esse case en e 1.8
A. OCEAN coon 1.9
B. Offshore ….…..…...…....……..rccrrrecssenesree ass cac ss annee 1.9
CE 1.9
D. Sheltered WaterS ee 1.9
13. Chart Your Course ...................=..ee.íeeeeeer 1.9
14. Water Sports ...............—..e.eeeereríericeriiecer DA 1.10
A. SWIMMING cee 1.10
B. Skiing vuoi K KR EEG 1.10
CAD E eee 1.10
15. Emergency Situations es 1.11
A. Medical Emergency... 1.11
B. Water Rescue ae 1.11
C. Fire ….....…......….crrrrecsrerrc esse rares annee rence 1.12
D. Flooding, Swamping and Capsizing .............. 1.12
E. Collisions and Leaking 1.12
F. Grounding ..................= KK 1.13
G. Propulsion, Control or Steering Failure .......... 1.13
16. Safety Hotlines ...................—.e....reeeieieieceeeee 1.13
17. Intemational Requirements ..................—..._e_e... 1.13
18. Nautical terms ..................—.e.eeeseeriereneereee e 1.14
19. Warning Label Locations 1.15
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
1. Docking/Lifting/Storage ………....……....…..…..….……….….….….…… 2.1
A. Bow and Stern Cleats 2.1
B. Supporting the Boat ers 2.2
2. Passenger LOcatiON vr 0... 2.2
3. Basic Boat Dimensions and Clearances ................ 2.4
4. Propulsion System ….….…....………...……crrerccssrercneneenues 2.4
5. General Deck Layout.….…...……….....…....……...rerccsereee 2.5
6.CabinLayout.............coce iii, 2.6
7. Control Station and Switch Layout ......................... 2.7
B.SPOIIEN «cove eee. 2.9
9. Function and Location of Through Hull Fittings
21010 À @7 0 1 (©) 0] (EEE 2.7
10. Major Controls……....…..…..………...…eserrrennerencaeeeee 2.12
A. Gear Shifts and Throttle Controls .................. 2.12
B. Engine Switch Panel .........................=...... 2.13
C. Hydraulic Trim Tabs ..................=eee.eeeeeeeenee 2.14
11. Important GaugeS es 2.16
À. Tachometer .……….…..…...…...…....….creecseecseccseennre 2.16
B. Quad GaUQ®e eK EEE 2.16
ON EN: 1C/-17/0|- E KK EEEE 2.16
D. Voltmeter ........cccirii ee KEG 2.16
E. Oil Pressure Gauge ..................ee=eeeee 2.17
F. Water Temperature Gauge ....................=..... 2.17
G. Hoursmeter …….…...…....…....……...……crrreccsreccnseeces 2.17
H. Magnetic Compass …….....…..….....………eecseseeeee 2.17
|. Systems Monitor .……..…..….....…...….….erersrreaneee 2.18
Display Control Module (DCM)
Function Table eK 2.20
J. Smart Craft with Systems View .................... 2.21
K. Sea Ray Navigator (SRN) (Optional) ............. 2.21
12. Navigation and Anchor Lights ....................——e..... 2.22
A. Console Dimmer ...................reeeeeeierieereeecce. 2.22
13. Switch á: Receptacie Layout ....................== 2.23
14. Lighting Layout ......................... eee, 2.26
SECTION 3 * USING Y OUR BOAT
1. PreparingtoDeparnt ............ocooviiiiiiii 3.1
2. While Underway ...................e.=..e.veeereeeereeeree ee. 3.1
3. Returningto Port... 3.2
4. Securing The BOA are 3.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
Vil
450 EB OWNER’S MANUAL ® TABLE OF CONTENTS
5. Fueling The BOAt ae 3.3 E. Engine Part Hitting Boat Structure .................. 4.5
A. General ANNA ANA RANA ENANA RRE R ARRE RARO RANRNEVTDO 3.3 F Other Possible Cause 4.5
B. Filling The Tank ooo A. 3.3 10. Oil Change System (Optional) 4.5
C. After Filling APE 3.3 A. Operating Instructions ……………………………………………… 4.5
6. Boarding STII HE 3.3 11. Underwater Gear... 4.6
7. Personal Flotation Devices (PFD) ....................———. 34 A. Propellers .....................e..mmiiien ree 4.6
8. Passenger Instruction and Location ...................... 34 B.ShaftS are eee 4.9
9. Starting The Engines eee rae 3.4 C. Shaft Log and Strong Seal ............................. 4.9
10. Shifting to Drive The Boat ......................———..——.——.. 3.6 D. Carrier Seal Kit ……………………………….…….….…….….……… 4.9
A. Gear Shifts and Throttle Controls ................... 3.6 EL SHU ooo 410
11. Stopping The Engine AS 3.7 12. Rudder & Rudder Stuffing Вох. 4.10
12. Starting The Generator ....................——.—.—————.—————— 3.7 13. Seacocks & Strainers ………………………….….……………… 4.11
13. Shifting From Shore Power to Generator Power .... 3.8 14. Hydraulic Steering Control... 4.12
14. Stopping The Generator .....................——.—————.——————— 3.8 15. Bilge Layout ...........ccoiiiiiiiii i, 4.13
15. Steering System .......ccoooiiiii e R KK E 3.9
16. ANCNONNG cone, 3.9
A. Anchoring Arrangement.......................=.—....—.. 3.10
DB. Anchoring .........................ee=ieeereeeerieer e 3.10
C. LoweringAnchor ................... ever 310 SECTIONS * FUEL SYSTEM
D. Setting Anchor .....................eexeeererieeereeeeeces 3.11
Е. Weighing АпсНог ... 3.11 1. Fuel System PE 5.1
F Clearing A Fouled ANnChOF 3.11 A. Fuel Tank a auaananenaa nen an enana a anda an RRE a en NR AEREA VENDA 5.1
G.AFinalWord .....н 3.11 B.FuelFill Inlet RE 51
17. WindlaSS «ur 3.12 G. Fuel Vent ee >.
A. To Operate From The Helm ......................... 312 2. Fuel Recommendations ..................—e.eeeeeeeeeeeeece 5.2
B. To Operate From The Bow .......................... 319 3. Crossover Fuel System …..…….…...………...…….……rccrececssecccuee 5.2
C.To Operate Manually Co 319 4. Fuel Filters................ Pres 52
D. Maintenance .................... ee 3.13 A. Generator Fuel Filter... 5.3
18. Bow Thruster (Optional) ............................ 3.13 В. Fuel Filter Maintenance ..................—..——.—.—.. 5.3
5. Fueling Precautions .………..….....……....……..…..….reereeneere 5.4
A. General ……..….....…...….crrresserecseeeessea casa annees 5.5
B. Before & During Fueling 5.5
C. After Fueling - Checklist.……….……………..……….…….………….…. 5.5
SECTION 4 * BILGE AND UNDERWATER GEAR
1. Bilge cee, 4.1
A. Fuel & Oil Spillage 4.1 SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
2. Bilge Pumps ................22.ee2eeeímieeerreeeree AA 4.1
3. Bilge Blowers ...................01m000000m0inn cise, 4.2 1.DC System... rer 6.1
4. Engines .................vvverriiieeeeeeeee EEE 4.3 2. Batteries serrer sense nana nana sean 6.1
5. Fresh Water Cooling System .........0.0. 4.3 A. To Remove The Battery Cables ...................... 6.2
A. Coolant Recommendations ............................ 4.3 B. Battery Maintenance eee 6.2
6. Engine Mounts ……….…….……….….……rereeenensen 4.3 3.Main DC Breaker Panel eee. 6.2
7. Marine Gears …….………….….…ciierseraeenmnnensnnnnsnn 44 4. Battery Switches and Solenoids ............................ 6.4
A. Reduction GearS ee 4.4 A. Main Engine Battery Solenoids ..................... 6.4
B. Reverse Gears ...............everncciiiieiee eee 4.4 B. Generator Solenoid... 6.4
8. Engine Exhaust system ..................... creeis 4.4 В. Bow Thruster Solenoid 6.5
9. Vibrations & Causes ……….……..….….……..…errreeceesenee 4.4 C. Windlass Solenoid ..............ccccoociiiiiiniiinnne, 6.5
A. Foreign Object Interferring With 5. Control Station Breaker Panel 6.5
Propeller Action …….…......….…….….……rererrrnesennse 44 6. Electrical System Fuse Blocks and Breakers......... 6.5
B. Bent Propeller and/or Shaft .......................—... 45 7.12 Volt System ..................eeeeeerericrecereceeeeneree De 6.6
C. Engine and Shaft Out of Alignment ................. 4.5 A. 12 Volt Accessory Receptacle ....................... 6.6
D. Coupling Out of true ....................=eíeeees 45 — 8.Emergency Start System 6.7
Vili 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
450 EB OWNER’S MANUAL ® TABLE OF CONTENTS
9. Electronics Circuit .....................eeseeeveeeereeer RK KE EEE 6.7
10. AC System ................eeeeecenceceeenecocerereaeensssse nece. 6.7
11. DC Distribution Panel ……....…....…....…….…crreeccsecces 6.8
12. Servicing The Main Distribution Panel ................... 6.8
A. To Replace A Faulty Component On The Main
Distribution Panel... 6.8
13. Shore Power ....................eeeeevririririeeereceere eee 6.1
A. Isolation Transformers 6.11
B. IsoBoost Transformer (Optional) .................... 6.11
C. Glendenning Cablemasters ........................... 6.11
D. Main Shore Power Breaker Box ................... 6.12
E. Shore Power Hookup ….……….……..………….………………eese 6.12
F. Maintenance For Shore Power Cable Set &
Shore Power Inlets ere 6.13
14. Generator.…..…...…...….....….…rrcrsercrrecanen esse casernes 6.13
A. Generator Operation een 6.13
15. Battery ChargerS ee ee, 6.14
A. Charging Characteristics ...................——..e..... 6.15
B. Charging Characteristics of the Bow Thruster
Battery Charger eK 6.15
16. Halogen LightiNQ 2er ee, 6.15
A. Changing a Blown BUlD rer 6.15
B. AC Low Voltage Lighting 6.16
17. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacie (GFI) ............ 6.16
A. International Receptacle ............................... 6.17
18. Electrolisis 8: Zinc Anodes ....................eeeeeeeeveeaes 6.17
19. AC & DC Electrical Schematics &
Wiring HarneSSeS eK 6.18
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
1. Layout and Accessories ...................ee2eeeíveeerceeeeee 7.1
2.Carbon Monoxide Monitors ..................... eee... 7.1
A. Testing The CO Monitor 7.1
3. Air Conditioning & Heating 7.1
A. To Start System ….…..…..…...….…....…….ecrrrercnereecunnee 7.2
4. Water System ................eereveeeciececcrnreeeeneeee De. 7.2
A. WatertanK..........coooiiiiii K EHEN 7.3
Filling The Water Tank ...................—..___.—_—_ 7.3
To Begin Initial Operation 7.3
Sanitizing The System .....................e=eee... 74
B. Water Pumps € Filters ................. e... 74
C. Water System Pressurization ........................ 7.4
D. Water Distribution Manifold ............................ 7.5
E.Waterheater ............coooviiiiiii 7.5
Initial Start-Up or After Winterization ............. 7.5
F. Dockside Water Inlet.....................— eee... 7.5
To Use The System ................eeeeeeeeveereecnes 7.6
G. Cockpit Shower ...................-....=eeeeeriricreeeeeee 7.6
H. Gray Water Sumbp .................eeeeeevecccicrceceeeeees
|. Fresh Water Washdown ..................—..=e.eeeeeee... 7.7
5. Head System ..................eeeeeereeecicececereeceeenneeeee e 7.8
A. requirement for Vessel Operators ................... 7.8
B. Vacu*-Flush Head ....................eeeeeeeerereeceeece. 7.9
C. Holding tank Operation 7.9
D.VentFilter ......ooriii eee 7.9
6. Macerator Discharge Pump with Seacock
Interlock System (Optional) ..........................—.... 7.10
To Operate the Macerator ......................... 7.10
7.Communication System .................e.=.eeeeeveeeeeeecees 7.10
A. Dockside Telephone Hookup .....................—.. 7.41
8. Entertainment Centers ......................eeeevvcecrececens 7.41
A. Salon Entertainment Center .......................... 7.11
B. Salon Entertainment Center (Optional) ........... 7.11
C. Master Stateroom Entertainment ................... 7.11
D. Guest Stateroom Entertainment .................... 7.11
E. Cockpit Entertainment .................... eee... 7.11
F. Bridge Entertainment ......................2......... 7.41
G. Dockside Television HOokup ...................—..... 7.11
H. TV Signal Selector ........................—......——. 7.11
9. Automatic Fire Extinguisher ...................——..—...—.. 7.12
A. Manual Fire Extinguishing System ............... 7.12
B. Hand Held Extinguishers ..........................—.. 7.13
10. Utility Room ................-.....eexreeeneeenree ee RER KKEE 7.13
11.Bow Thruster (Optional) ...........................eeee..... 7.13
12. Refrigerator/Freezer KK 7.14
A. Bridge Ice Maker e... 7.14
13. Coffee Maker ......................eeeevriccerecerreecerec e. 7.14
14. Stove 6 Microwave .....................verirrreceereceee. 7.14
A. Electric Stove ........ccoooiiiiiii i, 7.14
B. Microwave/ConvectionOven ......................... 7.15
15. Power Ventilation System ................-.....=reeeeeeeees 7.15
16. Central Vacuum System (Optional) .................... 7.15
17. Washer & Dryer (Optional) 7.15
18. Convertable Salon Sofa ……….………..…………..…………crsere 7.16
19. Live Baitwell (Optional) ........................—...xe.e.... 7.16
724 0 PA ©) «à RP EEE 7.16
21.Shore Power ....................eeeriricricerreeeereeeree ene. 7.16
22. CANVAS EEE 7.16
A. Care & Maintenance Eee 7.16
B. Storage ...............—..eenesiecieeneerreeneneereeeee ne. 7.17
C. Installation Tips ...................ee..ee2eeesveeerieeee 7.17
23. Floor Plan EEE 7.18
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE
AND MAINTENANCE
1. Summary Guide for Inspection, Service
and Maintenance ….….…..…..…..…..….........….srsrscasn creuse 8.1
2. Useful Information ……………….….….…..….….….….….…..resrrenes cnrs 8.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
450 EB OWNER’S MANUAL ® TABLE OF CONTENTS
3. Inspection, Service and Maintenance Protocol ........ 8.4
À. Bilge Area ee 8.4
1. Oil
2. Engine
3. Fuel System
4. Wiring System
5. Fittings, Hoses and Clamps
B. Topside and Supplies ee 8.5
4. Winterization Checklist for Boats Stored on Land…. 8.5
A.BoatStorage .........coovveiiiiiiii 8.5
B.ENQINES «oon ER EEK KK ER RE EEG 8.5
C. Battery(ies) .………….......……....…..…rrrecsererseccnerense 8.5
D. Head System …….....….....……...rrrrccrssereanerecennere 8.6
Е. Water System ….…....…….....…....rreeccsrcrccnereccnnnre 8.6
F. Fuel System …..…..…......….....…cecrrreccnserecaerec canne 8.6
5. Fitting Out After Storage …….…....….….....…….….…seeeceuss 8.7
A. Fuel System …..….....….....…..ccsrceccsrac see EEE 8.7
B. Battery(ies) ….……..…..……....…..…cecrrrerseccnerc cause 8.7
C. Miscellaneous ….………....……....……...…errcccsereccnssecenes 8.7
6. Security Considerations ee... REG 8.7
7. Seacock Lubrication …………..….……….…..……....……ecsrercceeeee 8.8
8. Engine Oil Change System viii, 8.8
9. Quick Reference Checklist ………..….....……....………..….….… 8.9
A. Boarding the Boat……...….....…...…......…....….….…….….…… 8.9
General
Boat Systems
Engine
B. Preparing to Depart and After Launching ....... 8.10
General
Engine
Starting the Engine
С. While Underway …….…...…………....…ccssrrecrcnnenre 8.11
General
Boat Systems
Engine
D. Retuming to Port ..................... eee 8.11
General
Boat Systems
Engine
E. Securing the Boat................. eee 8.12
General
Boat Systems
Engine
F. Ifthe Engine Does Not Start .................—.—.—.—.—.. 8.12
No Motor Response
Starter Motor Responds, But No Ignition
G. Operating the Generator ..................—.——_........ 8.13
Starting the Generator
Stopping the generator
10. After market Equipment Checklist ...................... 8.14
11. Maintenance LOG eK 8.13
SECTION 9 * CARE & REFINISHING
1. Maintenance & Reconditioning .......................—.—.—.—..
2. Fiberglass 8 gelcoat ..........................22... eee...
3. Stains & Scratches ................-.eeeeeeeeereveeeerreeeneenee.
4. Special Care for Boats that are Moored ................
5. Care for Bottom Paint ....................eeee=eeeeeeeeee
6. Bilge/Engine Compartment ....................——..e.==eee....
A. Keep Bilge Area Dry
7. Topside Areas ...................eeveeereecrcereceneceneseneneem ene.
8. Acrylic Plastic Sheeting (Plastic Glass) .................
9. Upholsteries .........cooiiii DA.
10. Lignapal® Cabinets ..................-.ee...eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee..
11. Cleaning recommendations for marine
Headliner & fabric.……..…..……..……...….crereserssecaseennre
Information in this publication is based upon the latest product specifications available at printing. Sea Ray® Boats,
Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time, without notice, in the colors, equipment, specifications, materials
and prices of all models, or to discontinue models. Should changes in production models be made, Sea Ray® is not
obligated to make similar changes or modifications to models sold prior to the date of such changes.
450 Express Bridge Owner's Manual
Printed in the U.S.A - December, 2002
© Sea Ray Boats, Inc. A Brunswick Company
MRP #1736630
The following are registered trademarks of the Brunswick Corporation: Sea Ray® & The SR Wave Logo
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
Safe Boating Means:
Knowing the limitations of your boat;
* Following the rules of the road;
* Keeping a sharp lookout for people and objects
in the water;
Not boating in water or weather conditions that
are beyond the boat's and the operator's
capability;
о Never boating when the operator is under the
influence of drugs or alchohol,
Being aware of your passenger’s safety at all
times; and
Reducing speed when there is limited visibility,
rough water, nearby people in the water, boats,
or structures.
Boating in beautiful weather and calm water
conditions can be a wonderful experience.
Pleasurable boating, however, requires considerably
greater skills than operating a land vehicle. To obtain
these skills, you must:
e Take a Coast Guard, U.S. Power Squadron or
equivalent boating safety course. Call the Boat/
U.S. Foundation at 1-800-336-2628 for
information on available courses.
(Get hands-on training on how to operate your
boat properly.
In addition:
Maintain your boat and its safety and other
systems as recommended in this manual.
Have the boat inspected by a qualified mechanic
or dealer, at least annually.
Ensure that the Coast Guard required safety
equipment is on board and functions. (See page iv).
1. SAFETY LABELS
Safety precautions are given throughout this manual
and labels are mounted at key locations throughout
the boat. This safety information advises the owner/
operator and passengers of imperative safety
precautions to follow when operating and/or
servicing equipment.
Figures 1.14.1 thru 1.18.1 show the location of
the safety labels on your boat.
Do not remove or obstruct any safety label.
* Replace any label which becomes illegible.
Replacement safety labels can be obtained by
calling your dealer or Sea Ray at 1-800-
SRBOATS for information on how to contact the
manufacturing facility for your boat.
The meaning associated with each of the four basic
types of label is:
f в
A DANGER
DANGER - Immediate hazards which WILL result in
severe personal injury or death if the warning is
| ignored.
J
WARNING - Hazards or unsafe practices which
COULD result in severe personal injury or death if
the warning is ignored.
J
CAUTION —- Hazards or unsafe practices which could
result in minor injury or product or property damage
if the warning is ignored.
NOTICE
Information which is important to proper operation
or maintenance, but is not hazard-related.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
1.1
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
2. LEGALLY MANDATED MINIMUM
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
Consult your national boating law enforcement
agency.
The following equipment is the minimum required
by the U.S. Coast Guard for a boat from 40’ to less
than 65’ [12.2 meters to less than 19.8 meters] in
length.
Personal Flotation Devices (PFD’s): One Coast
Guard approved Type |, Il or lll device is mandatory
for each person aboard. One throwable Type IV
device is also required to be on board. A Type V
device is acceptable if worn for approved use. See
Page 1.5 for a description of these PFD
classifications. Always wear a PFD when boating.
f A
NOTICE
S J
PFD REQUIREMENTS DIFFER
Depending on the state or country of operation the
operator of a vessel may be fined for failure to comply
with local or national rules regarding PFD usage. |
Fire Extinguisher - Portable: With a fixed fire
extinguishing system installed in the engine and
generator spaces, the American Boat and Yacht
Council (ABYC) recommends that you have two
(2) Type B-ll ABC fire extinguishers, one each
located at the helm station and outside the engine
compartment and Three (3) Type B-1 ABC
extinguishers located in the galley, the crew quarters
and the cabin, near the cockpit door.
Whistle, Horn: You must have on board some
means of making a loud sound signal, for example,
whistle or horn.
Visual Distress Signals: If you operate your boat
in coastal waters or on the Great Lakes, you must
have visual distress signals for day and night use
on board. At least three (3) U.S. Coast Guard
approved pyrotechnic devices marked with date
showing service life must be carried, be readily
accessible, in serviceable condition and not expired.
Store pyrotechnic signals in a well-marked
waterproof container in a dry location.
Other: Your Sea Ray is equipped with the required
navigation lights, engine exhaust and ventilation
systems.
3. FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
Your boat is equipped with an automatic fire
extinguisher system. Located in the engine
compartment. In the event of a fire, the heat sensitive
automatic head in the engine compartment will
release a fire-extinguishing vapor, totally flooding
the area.
The dashboard contains an indicator light for the
automatic fire extinguishing system. The light will
be ON when the ignition is on and indicates that the
system is ready. If the light goes out while the ignition
IS on, the system has discharged.
WHEN DISCHARGE OCCURS, IMMEDIATELY
SHUT DOWN ALL ENGINES, POWERED
VENTILATION, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND
EXTINGUISH ALL SMOKING MATERIALS. DO
NOT IMMEDIATELY OPEN THE ENGINE
COMPARTMENT! THIS FEEDS OXYGEN TO THE
FIRE AND THE FIRE COULD RESTART.
Wait at least fifteen (15) minutes before opening the
engine compartment. This permits the fire-
extinguishing vapor to “soak” the compartment long
f в
A DANGER
Fumes from engine, generators, and other equipment
and appliances using burning fuel contain carbon
monxide.
Carbon Monoxide can kill you.
Open all doors, curtains, windows, and hatches to let
fresh air circulate, when running engine, generator
or burning any fuel when boat is anchored, moored
or docked.
\. J
1.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
f A
A DANGER
Even in rainy cold weather ventilation must be
maintained to avoid Carbon Monoxide poisoning. You
will get wet and/or cold.
A DANGER
Sleeping on boat requires a operating Carbon
Monoxide detection system in each sleeping location.
enough for hot metals and fuels to cool. Have
portable extinguishers at hand and ready to use in
case the fire reignites. Do not breathe fumes or
vapors caused by the fire.
4. CARBON MONOXIDE
Symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning are
dizziness, ears ringing, headaches, nausea and
unconsciousness. A poisoning victim's skin often
turns cherry red. Because carbon monoxide gas
(CO) is odorless, colorless and tasteless, it is
unlikely to be noticed until a person is overcome.
Dangerous concentrations of carbon monoxide will
be present if:
the engine and/or generator exhaust
systems leak;
insufficient fresh air is circulating where people
are present; and
* fumes move from the rear of the boat into the
cockpit and cabin area.
Figure 1.3.1 gives examples of boat operating
conditions that can lead to high concentrations of
carbon monoxide gas.
To minimize the danger of CO accumulation when
the engine and/or generator are running, or using
burning fuel applications.
-
EXAMPLES Or How HicH LEVELS OF CARBON MONOXIDE MAY ACCUMULATE
(FiG. 1.3.1)
BLOCKING HULL EXHAUSTS. OPERATING AT
SLOW SPEED OR DEAD IN THE WATER. ILLUSTRATION #A
OPERATING ENGINE AND/OR GENERATOR
IN CONFINED SPACES. ILLUSTRATION #D
ILLUSTRATION HE
OPERATING WITH THE BOW HIGH.
WINDS BLOWING EXHAUST TOWARD
BOAT OCCUPANTS.
ILLUSTRATION HC
—
— ss
GOOD VENTILATION.
< «=== ===
ZZ ==
ILLUSTRATION HF
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
1.3
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
* Be sure to have sufficient ventilation when using
canvas or window-type side curtains when
underway, anchored, moored or docked.
e |f the convertible top is installed, operate with
the forward hatch open and leave cabin door
open.
e Operate all burning fuel appliances, such as
charcoal, propane, LPG, CNG or alcohol
cooking devices in areas where fresh air can
circulate. Do not use such devices where there
IS No noticeable air movement, especially in the
cabin, when anchored, moored or docked.
Do notidle engine without moving boat for more
than 15 minutes at a time.
Inspect the exhaust system regularly. (See
Section 8, Required Inspection, Service and
Maintenance.
If CO poisoning is suspected, have the victim breath
fresh air deeply. If breathing stops, resuscitate. A
victim often revives, then relapses because organs
are damaged by lack of oxygen. Seek immediate
medical attention.
A. CARBON MONOXIDE MONITOR
Your boat has carbon monoxide (CO) monitors
mounted throughout the boat . The CO monitor is
an electronic instrument that detects CO. When
there is a buildup of CO, the monitor will alert the
occupants by a flashing DANGER light and alarm.
The CO monitor is wired through a breaker on the
DC distribution panel.
It is extremely important that you become totally
familiar with your CO monitor and its functions.
Read and understand the CO monitor information
and operating instructions located in your Owner’s
Manual Packet.
S. LIFESAVING EQUIPMENT
Even strong swimmers can tire quickly in the water
and drown due to exhaustion, hypothermia, or both.
The buoyancy provided by a personal flotation
device (PFD) will allow the person who has fallen
overboard to remain afloat with far less effort and
heat loss, extending survival time necessary to find
and retrieve them.
Boat operators are required to carry one wearable
personal flotation device (Type |,II,!I! or V) for every
person on board. Boats must also have at least
one throwable device (Type IV).
The law requires that PFD’s must be readily
accessible, if not worn. “Readily accessible” means
removed from storage bags and unbuckled. But,
children and nonswimmers must wear PFDs at all
times when aboard. It is common sense to have
everyone on board wearing PFDs. A throwable
device must also be right at hand and ready to toss.
A. PFD CLASSIFICATIONS
Off-Shore Life Jacket (Type |) —
most buoyant, it is designed to
turn an unconscious person face
up; used in all types of waters
where rescue may be slow,
particularly in cold or rough
conditions. q J
(Fig. 1.4.1)
Near-Shore Life Vest (Type Il) —
“keyhole” vest with flotation-filled
head and neck support is also
designed to turn a person face up, de
but the turning action is not as
pronounced; used in calm, inland
waters or where quick rescue is | )
likely.
1.4
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
Flotation Aid (Type lll) — vest is (Fic. 1.5.1)
designed so conscious wearers
can turn face up; often designed
for comfort while engaged in
sports such as skiing.
Throwable Devices (Type IV) — (Fi. 1.5.2)
horseshoe buoys, ring buoys and
buoyant cushions are designed
to be grasped, not worn.
Special-Use Devices (Type V) —
sallboat harnesses, white-water
vests, float coats, and hybrid
vests which have minimum
inherent buoyancy and an
(Fig. 1.5.3)
ji
inflatable chamber.
Before purchasing PFDs, ensure
that there is an attached tag indicating they are
approved by the U.S. Coast Guard or by your
national boating law enforcement agency.
Children and nonswimmers must wear PFDs at
all times when aboard. All passengers and crew
should wear them. A loose PFD is often useless in
an emergency.
The operator is responsible for instructing everyone
aboard on the location and use of PFDs.
Size PFDs for the wearer. Children require special
attention in the use of PFDs.
Test PFD buoyancy at least once a year.
6. ADDITIONAL RECOMMENDED
EQUIPMENT FOR SAFE OPERATION
In addition to legally mandated equipment, the
following items are necessary for safe boating,
especially if your boat is out of sight of land.
e First aid kit
Visual distress signals for day and night use
(required in some areas; consult local
regulations)
e Charts of your intended cruising area
* Compass
e GPS or Loran position locating devices
* Marine VHF radio with weather channels
* Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacon
(EPIRB)
Manual bilge pump
Moisture repellant
e Anchors, chain and line (The anchors must be
properly sized for your boat. Ask your dealer or
marine supply store for recommendations).
e Mooring lines
e Fenders
* Boat hook
* Waterproof flashlight(s)
Extra batteries for flashlights and portable
electronic devices
e High power spotlight, if you intend to boat at night
* Spare keys
* Instruction manuals for engine and accessories
e Lubricating oil
* ToolKit:
- Assorted screwdrivers (Phillips and flat blade)
- Pliers (regular, vise-grip, and tongue & groove)
- Wrenches (box, open-end, allen, adjustable)
- Socket set (metric or U.S. Standard as
appropriate)
- Electrical tape and duct tape
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
1.5
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
- Hammer
- Utility Knife
* Spare parts kit (spark plugs, fuses, hose clamps
and ask your dealer to recommend other parts)
e [Extra propeller
7. IMPAIRED OPERATION
Drugs and/or alcohol will prevent you from operating
your boat safely. This single factor is involved in
more marine accidents and deaths than any other.
The detrimental effects of alcohol and drugs are
Increased by the wind, waves and sun, quickly
impairing your ability to react properly and promptly
in an emergency.
Drugs and/or alcohol! impair the operator's ability to
control the boat safely.
Death or serious injury can result from improper boat
operation.
Na J
8. Loap CAPACITY
A. UNITED STATES
Use common sense and sound judgement when
placing equipment and/or passengers in your boat.
The number of people on board must be reduced if
you go out in poor weather and rough water.
* The number of seats does not indicate how
many people a boat can carry in poor weather
and rough water.
* Above idle speed, all passengers must be
seated on the seats provided.
When engine is running, keep passengers away from
areas not designed for riding, such as seat backs,
bow, gunwales, transom platform, swim platform,
front and rear decks and on sun pads.
Passengers can fall overboard if not seated properly
on the seats provided.
J
The United States Coast Guard does not
provide specific numbers for passenger
capacity or cargo weight for recreational
vessels larger than 20 feet (6.09). For safety
sake, use the following information provided
for the international loading standards for
maximum number of passengers plus cargo
weight.
B. INTERNATIONAL
The certification plate located near the helm
indicates maximum weight and number of persons
your boat can handle under calm sea conditions.
Do not exceed the load capacities stated. The
number of people on board must be reduced if you
go out in poor weather and rough water.
| CERTIFICATION PLATE |
(FIG. 1.6.1) BOAT MANUFACTURER MFR'S MODEL
/
\
( € Sea Ray Bóats
0609 450 E
SET MAXIMUM
15')1+ 181= 1,815 kg
\ /
7
JAS NAXIMUM NUMBER MAXIMÓN LOAD /
DESIGN = OF PASSENGERS CAPACITY /
CATEGORY ss“
Ne J
The information present on the certification plate
does not relieve the operator from responsibility. Use
common sense and sound judgement when
placing equipment and/or passengers in your boat.
Do notload to capacity in poor weather or rough
water.
* The number of seats does not indicate how
many people a boat can carry in poor weather
and rough water.
1.6
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
* Above idle speed, all passengers must be
seated on the seats provided.
f в
A DANGER
Never carry more weight or passengers than indicated
on the certification plate, regardless of weather or
water conditions.
The boat can capsize, swamp or sink.
When engine is running, keep passengers away from
areas not designed for riding, such as seat backs,
bow, gunwales, transom platform, swim platform,
front and rear decks and on sun pads.
Passengers can fall overboard if not seated properly
on the seats provided.
9. POWER CAPACITY
The engine options available for your boat have been
selected as the best suited for general use for this
size boat. Do not install an engine larger than the
largest option available. Your boat will be difficult to
handle and will be less stable.
Your Sea Ray® has been equipped with a propeller
which our tests have shown to be the best suited
for general use with our engine under normal
conditions and load. Do not change the pitch of your
propeller without getting your dealer’s
recommendations first. If you change to a different
propeller pitch, under no circumstances use a
propeller which allows the engine to operate
at higher than recommended RPM. (your engine
manual specifies the maximum recommeded
(RPM).
To maintain rated power, propellers should be free
of nicks, excessive pitting and any distortions that
alter them from their original design. Badly damaged
propellers should be replaced, but those that are
chipped, bent or merely out of shape can be
reconditioned by your marine dealer.
It is advisable to carry an extra propeller aboard in
case you damage the one in use.
10. STABILITY
Your boat was manufactured to specific stability and
flotation standards for the capacity shown on the
certification plate. Any increase from the
recommended load capacities will put your boat in
jeopardy of capsizing, swamping and/or sinking.
f A
Distribute passengers and gear as uniformly as
possible from front to rear and left to right.
The manufacturer’s load rating is the maximum
allowed under calm conditions.
Reduce boat loading if weather, water or other
| conditions are adverse. |
IN ADDITION:
e Stability may be substantially reduced if
equipment is added above the deck.
e Stability is substantially reduced by loose fluids
or weight within the hull. Keep bilge area as dry
as possible, and close all openings, hatches
and windows in rough weather.
11. MAINTAIN CONTROL
On the water there are no marked traffic lanes, no
traffic signs or lights, and boats have no turn signals.
The boat operator must keep his or her attention
focused not only on what's ahead but what's on the
left, right and behind the boat.
Hitting an object in or under the water or boating in
dangerous currents can cause serious injury or death
to boat occupants.
You must know where the hazards are and avoid them.
In uncharted waters, boat very slowly and post a
lookout.
\. J
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
1.7
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
Shut engine off if an object is struck or if you run
aground.
Check for hull leaks and drive line damage, before
restarting engines.
Use hand pump if bilge pumps don't remove water.
Boat very slowly, if you must proceed with a damaged
drive line.
N J
The operator must always be alert to approaching
boats (from the rear, right and left sides, as well as
those ahead). There can be people in the water,
partially submerged debris, and other navigational
hazards such as rocks, sand bars and dangerous
currents, to name a few.
Your passengers are relying on you to operate and
maneuver the boat safely so that they are not in
danger of going overboard. If you turn to quickly,
Increase or decrease speed abruptly, your
passengers are at risk of being thrown overboard
or thrown about the boat.
When visibility becomes impaired because of
weather, time of day or high bow angle you must
slow down so that you have sufficient time to react
if an emergency occurs. Nearby boats face similar
risks in avoiding a collision with you.
A. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
* Know how your boat handles under different
conditions. Recognize your limitations and the
boat’s limitations. Modify speed in keeping with
weather, sea and traffic conditions.
Instruct passengers on location and use of
safety equipment and procedures.
Instruct passengers on the fundamentals of
operating your boat in case you are unable to
do so.
* You are responsible for passenger’s actions. If
they place themselves or the boat in danger,
Immediately correct them.
1.8
Observe the safety rules listed in the “warning”
information below.
f A
Death or serious injury can result if you fail to observe
these safety rules:
* Anyone who controls the boat must have
taken a boating safety course and have
trained in the proper operation of the
boat.
* Always operate the boat at speeds that
Will not put people or property in danger.
Be constantly aware of conditions in all
directions when underway and before
turning.
* Reduce speed, use a lookout to identify
possible hazards or difficulties, and turn
on navigation lights when:
- Visibility is impaired;
- in rough water; and
- in congested waterways.
* Watch your wake. It can capsize a small
boat or damage moored boats or other
property. You are responsible for damage
caused by your wake.
12. WEATHER
There are four design categories of boats based
upon their ability to withstand wind and sea or water
conditions. Your boat rating is displayed on the
f A
4 DANGER
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO BOAT IN
SEVERE WEATHER CONDITIONS
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR
GET TO SHORE BEFORE
THE WEATHER TURNS BAD
NN J
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
builders plate located near the helm. Do not operate
your boat beyond the conditions listed for your boats
rating.
A Ocean
Wind speed: above 40 knots (46 mph)
Wave height: above 4 meters (13 feet)
Boat may be used for extended ocean
voyages.
B. Offshore
Maximum wind speed: 40 knots (46 mph)
Maximum wave height: 4 meters (13 feet)
Boat can be used offshore, but not for
extended ocean voyages.
C. Inshore
Maximum wind speed: 27 knots (31 mph)
Maximum wave height: 2 meters (6.5 feet)
Boat use is limited to caostal waters, large
bays, estuaries, lakes and rivers.
D. Sheltered waters
Maximum wind speed: 15 knots (18 mph)
Maximum wave height: 0.5 meters (1.5 feet)
Boat use is limited to small lakes, rivers and
canals.
Your 450 EB is Design Category B.
The wind speed and wave height specified as the
upper limit for your category of boat does not mean
that you or your passengers can survive if your boat
IS exposed to these conditions. It is only the most
experienced operators and crew that may be able
to operate a boat safely under these conditions. You
must always be aware of weather conditions and
head for port or protected waters in sufficient time
to avoid being caught in high winds and rough water.
Do not take chances!
Getting caught in severe weather is hazardous. Bad
weather and/or rough sea or water conditions can
cause an unsafe situation. Consult local weather
information, or listen to the NOAA weather reports
for the latest weather conditions or any impending
deterioration of the weather before setting out and
while underway. Following are a few basic weather-
related rules:
Check the weather forecast and the water
conditions before leaving and while underway.
A sudden change in wind direction or speed or
an increase in wave height indicates
deteriorating weather.
Have everyone wear a personal flotation device.
о [fa storm approaches, immediately seek a safe
harbor.
* [fa storm hits, have everyone sit in the cabin or
on the cockpit deck in the boat. head the bow
into the wind with enough power to maintain slow
headway.
If you encounter fog, determine your position,
set a safe course, slow down and alert other
boats of your presence with a sound signal.
e [falightning storm approaches, the safest action
is to dock and disembark. If you cannot return
to shore, have passengers go inside the cabin
and remain there until the storm passes.
Lightning seeks a ground when it strikes. The
best protection is a properly grounded lightning
rod placed high enough over the deck to provide
a protective umbrella over the hull. Depending
upon the likelyhood of your being in a lightning
storm, consult your dealer for installation of a
lightning rod. Stay clear of the lightning rod, all
attached wiring and all metal parts of the boat.
e Stay out of the water during a lightning storm. If
caught swimming during a storm, get back into
the boat and remain there until the storm
passes.
13. CHART YOUR COURSE
To avoid boating in unsafe areas where there are
underwater obstructions, shallow water,
unnavigable conditions such as dangerous
currents, and others, you must chart a course.
This means having and using the National Oceanic
and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) charts for
coastal waters, observing and understanding all
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
1.9
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
navigational aids, using the knowledge and guidance
of experienced boaters, and being aware of the tide
times where appropriate.
If you are in an unfamiliar area without knowledge
of the hazards, proceed very slowly and have
someone watch for hazards.
Let others know where you are going. A float
plan describes your intended cruising course and
itinerary, boat description, and your expected time
and date of return.Give the float plan to a friend or
relative, so they can give the information to a
national boat agency, like the U.S. Coast Guard, in
the event you fail to return.
14. WATER SPORTS
A. SWIMMING
* Do not permit anyone to swim from a moving
boat, or a boat with an engine running.
e Many localities prohibit swimming from boats
except in designated areas.
* Make sure boat's engines are turned off before
allowing people to swim anywhere near your
boat. Shut the engine OFF and remove the key
from the ignition switch so that nobody will
accidentally start the engine while swimmers
are nearby.
* Turn off engines when taking swimmers or
skiers aboard or when they are entering the
water. Never permit use of the transom or
swim platform while engines are running.
* Slow down and look for swimmers or skiers
when cruising in an area where there might be
persons in the water.
B. SKIING
While itis unlikely that anyone would ski behind your
450 EB, it is advised that you become familiar with
water skiing safety and hand signals. You will, on
SKIING SIGNALS
(F16. 1.10.1)
Ny 7
TURN TURN RIGHT TURN LEFT STOP
= —— =
\ OR Is $ OR =
GO FASTER GO FASTER
Lans
OK AFTER FALL SKIER IN WATER CUT MOTOR BACK TO DOCK
occasion, find yourself in the vicinity of water skiing
activity.
Anyone who water skis must know how to swim.
e Never drive the boat directly behind a water skier.
At 22 knots (25 m.p.h.), it takes only 5 seconds
to overtake a fallen skier who was 60 meters
(200 feet) in front.
* Keep a downed skier in sight and on the
operator’s side of the boat when approaching
the skier. Never back up to anyone in the water.
Learn the signals to communicate with a skier.
The skier is to control the boat through hand
signals (Fig. 1.10.1).
Turn — Arm raised, circle with index finger
extended.
Skier in Water — Extend one ski vertically out
of water.
Back to Dock — Pat top of head.
Cut Motor — Draw finger across throat.
Slow Down — Thumb pointed down or palm
down, move hand up and down.
Faster — Thumb pointed up or palm up, move
hand up and down.
1.10
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 1
* SAFETY
OK — Raise arm and form a circle with thumb and
index finger.
Stop — Raise arm with palm vertical and
facing forward.
Turn Right — Extend arm out from body to
the right.
Turn Left — Extend arm out from body to
the left.
OK After a Fall — Clasp hands together
overhead.
e If the skier suddenly releases the tow rope, it
can backlash into cockpit. Spotters who are
watching the skier must be aware of this fact
and be prepared to deflect the rope by hand to
avoid injury.
C. Divina
Recognize and respect diving flags (Fig. 1.10.1).
Keep at least 30 meters (100 feet) away.
Sport Divers Flag — Red flag with diagonal
white stripe marks a diver in the water.
Code Alpha Flag — Blue and white pennant
designates boat being used in dive operations.
(Divers FLAGS
(Fic. 1.11.1)
CODE ALPHA
i SPORT DIVER'S
| FLAG FLAG
IN GENERAL
When engaged in water sports, be safe and courteous
to others sharing the water:
e Be considerate to fishermen.
Do not water skiin congested areas.
Na J
Keep the boat and skier away from navigation
markers.
e Stay well clear of other boats and skiers.
ASSISTING OTHER BOATERS
S J
All boaters have a legal obligation to help other
boaters who are in distress, as long as rendering
assistance does not endanger you, your passengers
or your boat.
15. EMERGENCY SITUATIONS
Prevention is the safest approach. We hope that you
are never involved in an emergency situation.
If you are involved in an emergency situation, it is
imperative that you know how to react, in order to
protect the lives in your care.
A. MEDICAL EMERGENCY
You may be far from professional medical help when
you are boating. At least two people on board your
boat should be CPR certified, and should have taken
a first aid course. Equip your boat with a first aid kit.
B. WATER RESCUE
A person who has fallen overboard will die from
hypothermia in water temperatures below 70°F if
not rescued quickly. Water rescue consists of three
steps: returning to the victim, making contact with
the victim, and getting the victim back on board.
RETURNING TO THE VICTIM
* Immediately make everyone aware of the
Incident and keep the victim in sight.
e Slow the boat and keep pointing toward the
person overboard. At night, direct the best
available light source at the person.
e Throw a life preserver, even if the person is
wearing a PFD. It will serve as another marker.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
1.11
SECTION 1
* SAFETY
MAKING CONTACT
e Stop or slow the boat and circle toward the victim.
e Tryto approach heading into the wind or into the
waves.
e Keep the victim constantly in sight.
* When almost alongside, stop the engine in gear
to prevent propeller “windmilling.”
GETTING BACK ABOARD
Tryto reach the victim with a pole, or by throwing
a life preserver. Do not swim to rescue the
victim, except as a last resort.
Assist the person in boarding the boat. The
person should normally be brought in over the
stern.
e Ifthe person is injured or cannot get into the
boat, a rescuer should put on a PFD with a safety
line attached to the boat and enter the water to
assist the victim.
Handle the victim with care. Spinal injuries may
have occurred.
C. FIRE
Fire is a serious boating hazard. Boats will burn
quickly. Do not remain on board and fight a fire for
more than a few minutes. If the fire cannot be
extinguished within a few minutes, abandon the
boat.
Have fire extinguishers handy. A small fire can be
extinguished quickly with the right size and type of
fire extinguisher.
e Extinguish smoking materials, shut off blowers,
stoves, engines and generators.
Throw burning materials overboard, if possible.
e If the fire is accessible, empty the contents of
fire extinguishers at the base of the fire.
e [Ifthe fire is inthe engine compartment and you
have an automatic extinguisher for the engine, wait
15 minutes before opening the compartment.
Have a portable extinguisher ready in case the fire
flares up.
e Signal for help.
(rab distress signals and survival gear. Put on
PFDs. Prepare to abandon ship.
D. FLOODING, SWAMPING AND CAPSIZING
In the event of flooding, swamping or capsizing:
Tryto shut off engines, generators and blowers,
before leaving the boat.
* Have everyone put on Personal Flotation
Devices (PFD's).
e Account for all who were on board.
If the boat is floating stay with the boat. Hang
on, or climb on the boat and signal for help.
Only as alast resort should you attempt to swim
to shore - it is further away than it looks and you
can tire and drown.
E. CoLLISIONS AND LEAKING
In the event of collision and leaking:
* Slow down or stop to reduce water intake,
unless maintaining speed will keep the hole
above water.
e Switch on bilge pumps.
Account for everyone on board and check for
injurys.
* Have everyone put on PFDs.
* Stay with the boat.
* Signal for help.
If a leak patch is attempted, it should be done
from the outside.
1.12
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
* Inthe eventofa collision, you are required to file
an accident report. Contact a state enforcement
agency or the nearest Coast Guard office. If you
are boating outside of U.S. waters, consult the
nation you are visiting for accident reporting
requirements.
F. GROUNDING
In the event of running aground:
Check for leaks. If water is coming in, stop the
intake of water before attempting to get the boat
free.
e Inspect for damage to the hull, propulsion and
steering systems.
* Determine if the tide, wind and current will drive
the boat harder aground or will help to free it.
* Determine the water depth all around the boat,
and the type of bottom (sand, mud, rocks, etc.).
If it can be done without exposing persons to
risk of injury, the boat should be moved away
from hard obstructions and toward open water
with soft ground.
e Do not attempt to have your boat towed by other
than a trained and competent service, such as
the Coast Guard or a salvage company.
Recreational craft are not designed to tow other
recreational craft.
G. PROPULSION, CONTROL OR STEERING
FAILURE:
If the drive train fails, or controls or steering do not
respond properly at all:
* Shut off engine.
Put out the anchor to prevent drifting.
e Determine whether or not you can repair the
problem yourself. See the proper manuals for
assistance in troubleshooting the engine,
steering and engine controls.
е If you are not sure you can fix the problem, or if
conditions are adverse, signal for help.
16. SAFETY HOTLINES
The safety information in the preceeding pages
gives only the general areas of concern for
boating safety. It is not intended to be, nor can
it be, exhaustive. You must take a boating
safety course, and get hands-on instruction in
the proper and safe operation of your boat from
experienced persons before cruising.
The U.S Coast Guard offers many pamphlets on
safety and other information not covered in this book.
Contact your local Coast Guard unit or call the toll-
free safety hotlines below for information.
* U.S. Coast Guard 1-800-368-5647
e (Canadian Coast Guard 1-800-267-6687
In other countries, ask your marine dealer for
information on how to contact the national boating
law enforcement agency.
17. INTERNATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
This vessel and its systems have been constructed
in accordance with standards and specifications in
effect at the time of manufacture as published by
the various regulatory authorities listed below.
. Ministere De La Mer - France
. Registro Italiano Navale - Italy
. Det Norske Veritas - Norway
. Securite des Nauires - Canada
. J.C.l. (Japan Craft Inspection) - Japan
. N.K.K. (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai) - Japan
. B.S.1. (British Standards Institute) - England
. Ministerio Obras Publicas Y Transportes - Spain
© O NOU SON =
. EC Recreational Craft Directive - European
Community.
Further information concerning these requirements
may be obtained from Sea Ray? Customer Service:
1-800-SRBOATS.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
1.13
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
18. NAUTICAL TERMS
Abeam — object 90 degrees to center line on either
side of boat.
Abaft — a point on a boat that is aft of another.
Aft — toward the rear or stern of the boat.
Beam — the width of a boat.
Bow — the fore part of a boat..
Bow Eye — Bolt with looped head mounted on
extreme forward part of bow.
Bulkhead — vertical partition in a boat.
Chine — meeting juncture of side and bottom of
boat.
Chock — deck fitting, used as guides for mooring
or anchor lines. Also, a wedge to stop wheels from
rolling.
Cleat — deck fitting with arms or horns on which
lines may be made fast.
Cockpit — an open space from which a boat is
operated.
Deck — upper structure which covers the hull
between gunwales.
Draft — depth of water required to float boat and its
propulsion system.
Fathom — six feet.
Fenders — rope or plastic pieces hung over the
side to protect the hull from chafing.
Freeboard — height of exposed hull from water line
to deck.
Ground tackle — general term referring to anchors,
anchor lines, etc.
Gunwale (pronounced gun’l) — meeting juncture of
hull and deck.
Hatch — an opening in deck to provide access below.
Head — toilet or toilet area in a boat.
Headroom — vertical distance between the deck and
cabin or canopy top.
Helm — steering console.
Hull — the basic part of a boat that provides buoyancy
to float the weight of the craft and its load.
Keel — the major longitudinal member of a hull; the
lowest external portion of a boat.
Knot — unit of speed in nautical miles per hour.
Lee — the side that is sheltered from the wind.
PFD — Personal Flotation Device; life preserver.
Port — term designating left side of the boat.
Rudder — Movable fixture at the stern used for
steering.
Scupper — hole permitting water to drain overboard
from deck or cockpit.
Sheer — curve or sweep of the deck as viewed from
the side.
Snub — to check or tighten a line suddenly.
Starboard — term designating right side of the boat
Stern — the aft end of a boat.
Stern drive — outboard unit of an inboard/outboard
(1/0) engine installation.
Stringer — longitudinal members fastened inside the
hull for additional structural strength.
Transom — transverse part of stern.
Wake — disturbed water that a boat leaves behind
as a result of forward motion.
Windward — toward the direction from which the
wind is blowing.
1.14
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
19. 450 EB WARNING LABEL LOCATIONS
=
Save Our Seas
It is illegal to dump plastic trash anywhere into the ocean or navigable waters of the
United States. Violation of these requirements may result in civil penalty up to
$25,000, a fine of $50,000 and imprisonment for up to five years.
PLASTIC - Includes but is not
limited to: plastic bags,
styrofoam cups and lids,
sixpack holders, stirrers,
straws, milk jugs, egg cartons,
synthetic fishing nets, ropes,
lines, and bio or photo degrad-
able plastics.
GARBAGE - Means paper,
rags, glass, metal, crockery
(generated in living spaces
aboard the vessel-what we
normally call trash), and all
kinds of food, maintenance
and cargo-associated waste.
“Garbage” does not include
fresh fish or fish parts, dish-
water, and gray water.
INSIDE 3 MILES
(and in U.S. Lakes, Rivers,
Bays and Sounds)
PLASTICS
DUNNAGE, LINING AND PACKING
MATERIALS THAT FLOAT
ANY GARBAGE EXCEPT DISHWATER/
GRAYWATER/FRESH FISH PARTS
3 TO 12 MILES
PLASTICS
DUNNAGE, LINNING AND PACKING
MATERIALS THAT FLOAT
ANY GARBAGE NOT GROUND TO LESS
THAN ONE SQUARE INCH
12 TO 25 MILES
PLASTICS
DUNNAGE, LINING AND PACKING
MATERIALS THAT FLOAT
12 TO 25 MILES
PLASTICS
DUNNAGE- Material used to
block and brace cargo, and is
considered a cargo associ-
ated waste.
DISHWATER- Means the lig-
uid residue from the manual
or automatic washing of
dishes and cooking utensils
which, have been pre-cleaned
to the extent that any food
particles adhering to them
would not normally interfere
with the operation of auto-
matic dishwashers.
GRAYWATER - Means drain-
age from a dishwasher,
shower, laundry, bath, and
washbasin, and does not in-
clude drainage from toilets,
urinals, hospitals, and cargo
spaces.
BEHIND MDP CABINET DOOR
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
1.15
SECTION 1 * SAFETY
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
1.16
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
19. 450 EB Warning Label Locations
WARNING LABEL LOCATIONS
(Fic. 1.17.1)
- DO NOT LEAVE BOAT UNATTENDED WITH THE
DOCKSIDE WATER HOSE CONNECTED.
- DOCKSIDE WATER SHOULD BE CONNECTED
DURING PERIODS OF HEAVY WATER USE ONLY.
MRP 852616 SR-124
INSIDE TRANSOM
Ge Ge
RUNNING BOAT WITH DOOR OPEN COULD
Ил CNI CNI DA
INDUCE EXHAUST FUMES INTO CABIN.
SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS
CONCERNING CARBON MONOXIDE.
MRP#1672112
LEAKING FUEL IS A FIRE AND
EZPLOSION HAZARD, INSPECT
SYSTEM REGULARY. EXAMINE
FUEL TANKS FOR LEAKS OR COR-
ROSION AT LEAST ANNUALLY.
MRP # 852632 SR-151
Na
A DANGER
TRANSOM DOOR MUST BE
CLOSED AND SECURE WHEN
ENGINE IS RUNNING
SR-102
STAINLESS STEEL SLIDING SWIM LADDERS
SUGGESTED CARE & MAINTENANCE
AFTER EACH USE:
Fully extend ladder and thoroughly rinse all ladder and slide surfaces with
fresh water. Pay special attention to flushing any debris and salt water
from the slide areas.
MONTHLY:
Examine the ladder slide grooves and remove any foreign particles lodged
within the grooves.
Wash entire ladder, uning ONLY a clean, soft cloth, and mild soa
solution. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water. To prevent damage NEVER
USE ABRASIVES or ABRASIVE CLEANERS!
Allow ladder to dry after washing. Apply a light coating of spray lubricant
or clear silicone grease to the slide areas ONLY. Work ladder back and
forth to assure distribution of lubricant and ease of operation.
CAUTION - TO PREVENT THE POSSIBILITY OF PERSONAL INJURY
ENSURE THAT ANY LUBRICANT IS CLEANED FROM LADDER
RUNGS AND STILES PRIOR TO USE.
Inspect the ladder for damage and check the security of all fasteners.
Repair damage and/or tighten any hardware that may have become loose
prior to use.
MRP 1573112 SR-505
Na
UNDER HATCH
SHORE POWER
WARNING
To minimize shock hazard, connect and disconnect cable as
follows;
1. Turn off boat's shore power switch.
2. Connect cable at boat first.
3. Ifequipped with polarity indicator which activates,
disconnect and connect polarity.
4. Disconnect at shore outlet first.
5. Close inlet cover tightly.
DO NOT ALTER SHORE POWER CABLE CONNECTORS
A DANGER
TO AVOID RISK OF SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH SHUT OFF ENGINE WHEN NEAR
SWIMMERS OR PRIOR TO USING SWIM
PLATFORM AND BOARDING LADDER.
MRP 1112879 SR-214
UNDER BRIDGE STEPS
J
SR-285
ABOVE CABIN ENTRY DOOR
BRIDGE CAPACITY INFORMATION
MAXIMUM WEIGHT CAPACITY UNDERWAY
(PERSONS & GEAR) 1500 LBS.
YACHT CERTIFICATION
UN THE DATE OF CERTIFICATION 16 VERIFIED, MANUFACTURE
RESPONSIBLE FOR SBODUCTION CONTROL
HANONAL MARINE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
THIS ADAL COMPLIES WITH LS. COAST GUARD SA
¡AROS 1 EFFECTON T
RAY BOAT, PUE”
DOMESTIC
AVOID COLLISIONS
. Maintain look-out as required by the “Rules of the Road”.
. Visibility can be limited by high boat trim angles. persons, gear, weather
and light conditions.
.At all times proceed at a Safe Speed so that you can take proper and
effective action to avoid hazardous conditions.
Such issues are considered under the control of the operatror!
AVOID RISK OF INJURY OFR DEATH, SHUT OFF ENGINE PRIOR TO
USING SUNPADS, SWIM PLATFORM OR BOARDING LADDER.
Sea Ray Boats
450 EB
DESICA COMPLIANCE WITO MAMA ACQUIBEMENTO IN EFFECTS OR
MAXIMUM
15+ = 1,815 kg
CE OPTION
|_MRP 987727 SR-187 J
WARNING
—READ THE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE OPERATING
THE WINDLASS.
—KEEP HANDS AND FEET AWAY FROM GYPSY AND
CHAIN AT ALL TIMES.
—WHEN WINDLASS IS NOT IN USE OR BEFORE
USING THE HANDLE, TURN OFF THE WINDLASS
AT THE MAIN SWITCH.
—ENGAGE THE CHAIN STOPPER AFTER ANCHORING.
WINDLASS MUST NOT BE USED AS SOLE MEANS
OF SECURING ANCHOR IN BOW FITTING. ANCHORS
MUST BE INDEPENDENTLY SECURED TO PREVENT
ACCIDENTAL RELEASE.
—BE SURE THE CLUTCH AND THE CHAIN STOPPER
ARE WELL ENGAGED BEFORE SAILING.
1
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES
SHOULD YOU LOOK DIRECTLY INTO
THE RADOME FROM A DISTANCE OF
LESS THAN TWO FEET WHEN
RADAR IS IN OPERATION
A DANGER
A DANGER
N
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
DO NOT CLIMB UPON OR STORE
EQUIPMENT ON HARDTOP
TRANSOM DOOR MUST BE
MRP 1017375 SR-198
ON UNDERSIDE OF HATCH
ENGINE IS RUNNING
CLOSED AND SECURE WHEN
MRP 811000 SR-102
\ MRP 1126226 SR-152 À
TUE
DO NOT CLIMB UPON OR STORE
EQUIPMENT ON HARDTOP
MRP 1017375
|
| A
je в
0
0
0
©
В J
9
; A
<
Loo >
IL
x к eS 7
A DANGER
STAY CLEAR OF MOVING PARTS
MRP # 921759 SR - 162
UNDERSIDE OF HATCH
SR-198
ON UNDERSIDE OF HATCH
450 EB Warning Label Locations
и
WARNING LABEL LOCATIONS
(Fi. 1.18.1)
1
«a
DISCHARGE OF OIL PROHIBITED
THE FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT PROHIBITS THE
DISCHARGE OF OIL OR OILY WASTE INTO OR UPON THE NAVIGABLE
WATERS OF THE UNITED STATES OR THE WATERS OF THE CONTIGUOUS
ZONE IF SUCH DISCHARGE CAUSES A FILM OR SHEEN UPON OR A
DISCOLORATION OF THE SURFACE OF
SLUDGE OR EMULSION BENEATH THE
VIOLATORS ARE SUBJECT TO A
MRP # 258509
=
| ADAGERÁ DANGER A
AVOID COLLISIONS
¢ Maintain Look-out as required by the “Rules of the Road”.
* Visibility can be limited by high boat trim angles. persons,
gear, weather and light conditions.
* At all times proceed at a Safe Speed so that you can take
proper and effective action to avoid hazardous conditions.
Such issues are considered under the control of the operatror!
AVOID COLLISIONS
In all gasoline powered boats, engine and generator exhaust
systems produce colorless and odorless carbon monoxide gas
(“CO”). Direct prolonged exposure can result in CO poisoning
which may be harmful or fatal. To prevent excess exposure and
reduce the possibility of accumulations of CO in the cabin and
cockpit of the boat, the operator should insure adequate ventilation
in each the cabin and cockpit areas, through utilization of cabin
hatches, cabin doors, cabin windows, cockpit windshield windows
and side windshield vents to increase air movement through the
cabin and cockpit areas. The following conditions tend to increase
the accumulation of CO in and about the boat and require the
operator’s particular attention:
. Operation at slow speeds or dead in the water.
. Operation with a high bow angle attitude.
. The utilization of canvas tops, side curtains and back
curtains.
. Contributing climatic condtions, such as a head wind.
. Operation of engines and/or generator inconfined
spaces or at dockside.
. Any blockage of hull exhaust outlets.
Indications of excessive exposure to CO concentrations may
include nausea, dizziness and drowsiness.
DO NOT USE-Sun Pads, Boarding Ladder or Swim Platform
and Transom Door should be closed when engine is running.
MRP 987719 SR-193
WN =
a.
œ
THE WATER OR CAUSES A
SURFACE OF THE WATER.
PENALTY OF $5,000.
THIS BOAT IS EQUIPPED WITH
AN OPTIONAL DIRECT OVERBOARD
DISCHARGE VALVE. DISCHARGING
OF SEWAGE DIRECTLY OVERBOARD
IS FOR USE WHERE APPROVED ONLY
MRP 955278 SR-118
WITH MACERATOR OPTION ONLY
LEVEL APPROXIMATELY EVERY 4
MRP # 914341 SR-139
CHECK BATTERY CELL FUEL
WEEKS AND MORE OFTEN IN
SUMMER AND HOT ZONES.
1
BEARINGS.
ENGINES TO PREVENT SEA
\ MRP # 1089242
PRIOR TO TOWING VESSEL:
* LOCK PROPELLOR SHAFT(S) TO PREVENT
DAMAGE TO SHAFT SEAL AND TRANSMISSION
* CLOSE SEACOCKS ON NON-OPERATING
WATER INGESTION.
SR - 203
A DANGER
STAY CLEAR OF MOVING PARTS
MRP # 921759
SR - 162
1.18
UNDER HATCH
TURN OFF COFFEE MAKER
BEFORE CLOSING DOOR
MRP 852616 SR-134
INSIDE CABINET
KEEP CABINET DOORS OPEN
AND EXHAUST FAN ON WHILE
APPLIANCES ARE IN USE.
MRP 1640176 SR-278
INSIDE CABINET
7 + — SD—
TE
N
N
N
N
N
A DANGER
LEAVING WINDOW OPEN COULD
INDUCE EXHAUST FUMES
INTO CABIN RESULTING IN SEVERE
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH
MRP 852566 SR-135
TYPICAL ONALL OPENING PORTLIGHTS
J
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
450 EB Warning Label Locations
WARNING LABEL LOCATIONS
(F1G. 1.19.1)
L NOTICE )
CHECK BATTERY CELL FLUID LEVEL
APPROXIMATELY EVERY 4 WEEKS AND MORE
OFTEN IN SUMMER AND HOT ZONES.
TYPICAL ON TOP OF ALL BATTERIES
A DANGER
INTERMEDIATE BREAKER FOR
SHORE POWER CONNECTION.
UNPLUG SHORE POWER BEFORE
REMOVING COVER. WILL CAUSE
INJURY OR DEATH.
X MRP 852582 SR-154
J
ON SHORE POWER BREAKER
A DANGER
UNPLUG SHORE POWER AND TURN
BATTERIES
CAUTION A
WD * BATTERIES ENCLOSED DANGER
N * SERVICE WEEKLY
« REPLACE COVER WHILE UNDER WAY UNPLUG SHORE POWER AND
TURN OFF GENERATOR
BEFORE REMOVING COVER
MRP # 852582 SR - 154
ON ALL J-BOXES
TYPICAL UNDER ALL BATTERY COVERS
LEAKING FUEL IS A FIRE AND
EXPLOSION HAZARD, INSPECT
SYSTEM REGULARY. EXAMINE
FUEL TANKS FOR LEAKS OR
CORROSION AT LEAST ANNUALLY.
L MRP # 852632 SR-151 y
BATTERIES
CAUTION
e BATTERIES ENCLOSED
SERVICE WEEKLY
+ REPLACE COVER WHILE UNDER WAY
TYPICAL UNDER ALL BATTERY COVERS
OFF GENERATOR BEFORE
REMOVING COVER.
MRP 852582 SR-154
TYPICAL ON ALL J-BAX COVERS
STAY CLEAR OF MOVING PARTS
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING.
4 DANGER
MRP 852624 SR-149
TYPICAL ON P & S STRINGER UNPLUG SHORE POWER AND TURN
OFF GENERATOR BEFORE
REMOVING COVER.
MRP 852582 SR-154
( NOTICE
CHECK BATTERY CELL FLUID LEVEL
APPROXIMATELY EVERY 4 WEEKS AND MORE
OFTEN IN SUMMER AND HOT ZONES.
TYPICAL ON TOP OF ALL BATTERIES
1.19
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
1.20 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
1. DocKING/LIFTING/STORAGE
Do Not use cleats for lifting.
A. Bow AND STERN CLEATS
Cleats must not be used for lifting the boat, they
are intended for docking or mooring use only.
f A
CLEAT LOCATIONS fi
(Fra. 2.1.1) AUN
N J
When lifting the boat always keep the bow higher
than the stern to drain the exhaust lines and to
prevent water from running forward through the
manifold and into the engine where it can become
trapped. It may seem expedient to lift only the stern
when changing a propeller, but this can result in
water entering the engine cylinders, causing
hydrostatic lock and resulting in possible engine
failure. Even a small amount of water in the engine
can cause rust and is to be avoided.
With fiberglass boats, severe gelcoat crazing or
more serious hull damage can occur during
launching and hauling if pressure is created on the
gunwales by the slings. Flat, wide belting-type slings
and spreaders long enough to keep pressure from
the gunwales are necessary. Cable-type slings
should be avoided. Do not place the slings where
they may lift on the propeller shaft or other
underwater fittings. The slings should be placed
directly over the sling tags imprinted on the deck to
assure the least amount of stress on the hull.
Never hoist the boat with an appreciable amount of
water in the bilge. Fuel and water tanks should
preferably be empty, especially if of large capacity.
PROPER LIFTING AND STORAGE OF THE 450 EB
(FIG. 2.1.2)
SLING STRAPS
A
SLING TAG
A
SLING TAG
8’ 11 1/2”
Na
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.1
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
B. SUPPORTING THE BOAT
A cradle is the ideal support for the boat whenever
it is not in the water. Properly designed and
constructed, it will provide support at the proper
points, which is essential to avoid stress on the
hull.
Boat placement on the cradle should line up as
closely as possible to the sling tags on the side of
the deck. Do not rest boat on underwater fittings.
While the person at the wheel must alert
passengers before any sudden or erratic boat
movement, such as crossing wakes, rapid
turns, sudden acceleration or deceleration, etc.,
an emergency action may be necessary before
passengers can be warned. All passengers
must be prepared for rapid boat movement and
be able to hold on to prevent loss of balance.
When persons are on the working deck area,
for anchoring, mooring or in emergencies, they
must be holding on and be positioned so as to
prevent falling. In bad weather and/or rough
water, if it is essential to be on deck, persons
should be closely tied to cleats, railing
stanchions or other securely fastened boat
hardware.
Engines must be turned off if the boat is near
swimmers or persons are on the swim platform
or the swim ladder.
Г N
PROPER SUPPORT OUT OF WATER
(Fic. 2.2.1)
CORRECT SUPPORT INCORRECT SUPPORT
(NO GAP BETWEEN (GAP CREATES UNDUE
HULL AND CRADLE) STRESS BETWEEN HULL
AND CRADLE)
\. J
2. PASSENGER LOCATIONS
1. When the boat is moving, all passengers must
be in the cockpit area or in the cabin and must
be on seating provided or, if standing, holding
on firmly (See Figure 2.3.1).
Boat motion can be erratic.
You can fall overboard or be injured by hitting
something in or on the boat.
All persons must be in cockpit area or cabin and be
prepared for sudden boat movement.
Use front or bow deck area only during anchoring,
mooring or emergencies.
2.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
1
PASSENGER LOCATIONS (CocKPIT 4 DECK)
(FIG. 2.3.1)
PORT
FWD 7 WORKING DECK
7 (DECK AREA INTENDED FOR OCCUPATION
Z DURING ANCHORING, MOORING AND
EMERGENCY OPERATION ONLY)
STBD
ACCOMODATION DECK
(DECK AREA INTENDED FOR OCCUPATION
DURING NORMAL OPERATION)
A
DO NOT STAND OR WALK ON THIS AREA.
SERIOUS INJURY COULD RESULT.
KEEP OFF
HATCH
DEC
SZ
NN
AAA IX
NN
ADOS
NN
ON
N 7
KHATCH
CEN EXIT)
DO NOT USE SUNPAD WHEN
BOAT IS UNDERWAY.
PERSONAL INJURY
HAZARD
When underway, keep occu-
pants clear of areas not de-
signed for riding. Especially
hazardous areas include
seat backs, bow, gunwale,
transom platform and fore
and aft decks.
SLIPPING HAZARD - Wet
decks are slippery. Wear
proper footwear and use ex-
treme caution on wet sur-
| faces.
DO NOT CLIMB ON OR STORE
EQUIPMENT ON HARD TOP.
f A
A DANGER
TO AVOID RISK OF SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH SHUT OFF ENGINE WHEN
NEAR SWIMMERS OR PRIOR TO USING
SWIM PLATFORM AND BOARDING
LADDER.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.3
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
3. Basic BOAT DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES
BOAT DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES
(FiG. 2.4.1)
13 7 12 21" 5/8
(4.15m) | (6-42m)
=. L [ 16’ 4 1/8”
CD — Y (4.98m)
—— _ _ TT
5 Е — ———— WATER LINE
1.04m == -
1] *
45’ 6” (13.86m)
48’ 7” (14.8m)
51’ 4” (15.65m)
Overall Length w/bow |
pulpit and swim platform- 51’ 4” 15.65m 14’ 8”
Веат 14° 8” 4.47m (4.47m)
Draft 41” 104.1cm |
Dry Weight (Ibs.) ---------- 29,500 13,381kg
Fuel Capacity (gal.) ------- 400 1,514 (liters) Height Dimensions:
Water Capacity (gal.) ----- 100 378.5 (liters) Keel to top of mast light -- 21’ 5/8” 6.42m
Holding Tank (gal.) --------- 60 227.1 (liters) Keel to top of spoiler ------ 16’ 4 1/8” 4.98т
Dead Rise 15° 15° Keel to top of bridge ------- 13’ 7 1/2” 4.15m
4. PROPULSION SYSTEM
A. V-DRIVE ENGINES
The engines on the 450 EB are inboard V-drive type
propulsion systems. The V-drive system
Incorporates an inboard engine with an angled
transmission that allows the drive shaft to pass
through the hull under the engine. See Section 4,
Bilge and Underwater Gear for more information
on the engines in your boat.
REFER TO ENGINE OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR
MORE DETAILED INFORMATION.
1
V-DRIVE ENGINE
(FiG. 2.4.2)
2.4
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
5. GENERAL DECK LAYOUT
GENERAL DECK LAYOUT
(FIG. 2.5.1)
(4) BOW PULPIT
WINDLASS REMOTE FOOT PEDALS
(©) WINDLASS
(D) DECK HATCH
(E) WALKTHROUGH TO DECK FROM BRIDGE
(®) CAMPANION BRIDGE SEATING
(G) CONTROL STATION
(H) CAPTAINS CHAIR
(1) AFT BENCH SEATING
(J) WASTE PUMP-OUT
(1) FISH BOX
(D STARBOARD FUEL FILL
(M) TRANSOM STORAGE LOCKER
(N) SWIM PLATFORM
(0) SWIM LADDER
(P) PORT FUEL FILL
(Q TRANSOM SHOWER
(A) LIVE BAIT WELL
(©) WATER TANK FILL
(T) BRIDGE ACCESS STEPS
(U) ANCHOR CHAIN LOCKER
(V) ANCHOR CHUTE
© |=
CD CD
\. J
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 2.5
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
6. CABIN LAYOUT
f в
FORWARD CABIN
(FIG. 2.6.1)
(A) MASTER STATEROOM BUNK
ACCESS HATCH FOR MASTER STATEROOM AC
= (UNDER MATTRESS)
AN © MASTER STATEROOM ENTERTAINMENT
CENTER
(©) GUEST STATEROOM HEAD
N (E) GUEST STATEROOM SHOWER
(F) GUEST STATEROOM SINK
\ (G) GUEST STATEROOM HANGING LOCKER
ff, (1) GUEST STATEROOM ENTERTAINMENT CENTER
| | ON SWIVEL BASE
(1) GUEST STATEROOM BUNK
(J) MASTER STATEROOM SHOWER
Ni (K) MASTER STATEROOM HEAD
M
L
© | NO (©) MASTER STATEROOM SINK
| /
| .
O 7 -
(M) MASTER STATEROOM HANGING LOCKER
AFT CABIN
(FIG. 2.6.2)
(4) SKY LIGHT OVER GUEST STATEROOM
BOTTLE RACK
(C) STARBOARD SOFA
(D) MOVEABLE TABLE
(E) UTILITY ROOM W/ELECTRICALLY
ACTUATED HATCH
(E) WASHER/DRYER (OPTIONAL)
(G) SALON ENTERTAINMENT CENTER
(H) PORT SOFA
(1) AC MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL
(J) DC MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL
(K) COFFEMAKER
(1) GALLEY SINK
(M) OPTIONAL VACUUM CLEANER (UNDER HATCH)
(N) THREE-BURNER STOVE
©) MICROWAVE/CONVECTION OVEN
(P) REFRIGERATOR
(@ GALLEY COMPANIONWAY
\ J
2.6 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
7. CONTROL STATION GAUGE AND SWITCH LAYOUT
1
CONTROL STATION WITH SMART CRAFT SYSTEM VIEW
(FIG. 2.7.1)
(A) SWITCH PANEL
AUTOPILOT (OPTIONAL)
(©) VHF RADIO SPEAKER
(D) RADAR
(E) SPOTLIGHT CONTROL
(F) GAUGE PANEL (SEE FIG. 2.8.1)
(G) COMPASS
(H) SMART CRAFT™ SYSTEM VIEW
(1) BOW THRUSTER TOGGLE
(OPTIONAL)
© BOW THRUSTER MAIN SWITCH
(OPTIONAL)
(K) STEREO REMOTE
(D) THROTTLE CONTROL
(M) AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER
INDICATOR
(N) TRIM TAB SWITCH
(©) GEAR SHIFTS
(P) BREAKER PANEL
(Q) VHF RADIO
(R) 12 VOLT RECEPTACLE
(S) ENGINES SWITCH PANEL
(T) GPS
© SYSTEM MONITOR
(Fic. 2.7.2)
(A) SWITCH PANEL
SEA RAY NAVIGATOR (OPTIONAL)
(©) VHF RADIO
(©) RADAR
(E) SPOTLIGHT CONTROL
(F) GAUGE PANEL (SEE FIG. 2.8.1)
(©) COMPASS
(©) SMART CRAFT“ SYSTEM VIEW
(1) AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER
INDICATOR
(J) BOW THRUSTER TOGGLE
(OPTIONAL)
BOW THRUSTER MAIN SWITCH
(OPTIONAL)
(1) STEREO REMOTE
(M) THROTTLE CONTROL
(N) SEA RAY NAVIGATOR CONTROLLER
(0) TRIM TAB SWITCH
(P) GEAR SHIFTS
(Q) AUTOPILOT (OPTIONAL)
(R) BREAKER PANEL
(S) VHF RADIO SPEAKER
(M) 12 VOLT RECEPTACLE
(U) ENGINES SWITCH PANEL
(V) SYSTEM MONITOR
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.7
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
CONTROL STATION GAUGE AND SWITCH LAYOUT
f \
CoNTROL STATION GAUGE PANEL
(FIG. 2.8.1)
(A) PORT ENGINE QUAD GAUGE (5) STARBOARD ENGINE TACHOMETER
PORT ENGINE TACHOMETER ® STARBOARD ENGINE QUAD GAUGE
© SMART CRAFT™ SYSTEM VIEW
\. J
f =
CONTROL STATION SWITCH PANEL
(FIG. 2.8.2)
O
| ACCY ACCY |
Sa Reger
LIGHTS
Fr BRIDGE SPOILER RUNNING ANCHOR инс
BILGE ENGINE WINDLASS
BLOWERS SYNC ELECT AUTOPILOT MAIN CONTROL
Po
SEA RAY BOATS
ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL
SYSTEMS MONITOR
AUDIBLE RESET
ALARM SELECT 6
\. J
PORT EMERGENCY STBD BILGE PUMPS
IGNITION START IGNITION FWD AFT HORN
2.8 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
CONTROL STATION GAUGE AND SWITCH LAYOUT
f A
ENGINE SWITCH PANEL
(Fıc. 2.9.1)
O O )
—— PORT— —STBD —
| | WAIT WAIT
ENGINE | CRUISE 1 SLOW | ENGINE ENGINE
| SYNC CRONE 2 | IDLE START MAINT, START MAINT.
— — STOP CHECK STOP CHECK
ENGINE ENGINE ENGINE ENGINE
ha A he A
O O O
\ J
8. SPOILER
[ NN
SPOILER
(FiG. 2.9.2)
(A) (A) VHF ANTENNA
TV ANTENNA
© MAST LIGHT
(©) RADAR (OPTIONAL)
® STERN LIGHT
E) (F) GPS ANTENNA
O
\ J
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 2.9
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
9. FUNCTION AND LOCATION OF THROUGH-HULL FITTINGS AND CUTOUTS
1
STARBOARD THROUGH-HULL FITTINGS
(Fic. 2.10.1) (A) STARBOARD ENGINE EXHAUST ~~ (H) GUEST HEAD POWER VENT
GENERATOR EXHAUST (1) BOW THRUSTER (OPTIONAL)
(C) STARBOARD FUEL FILL VENT (J) DECK DRAIN
(D) BILGE VENT (K) CHAIN LOCKER DRAIN
(€) HOLDING TANK VENTS (1) DECK DRAIN
(F) WASHER (OPTIONAL) EXHAUST (M) HORN
(G) DRYER (OPTIONAL) EXHAUST
PORT THROUGH-HULL FITTINGS
(Fic. 2.10.2)
(A) DECK DRAIN (© GALLEY POWER VENT
CHAIN LOCKER DRAIN (H) WATER TANK VENTS
(©) DECK DRAIN (1) PORT FUEL FILL VENT
(D) BOW THRUSTER (OPTIONAL) (3) COMMON DRAIN
(E) MASTER HEAD POWER VENT | (KM) PORT ENGINE EXHAUST
(E) VACUUM EXHAUST
J
2.10 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
FUNCTION AND LOCATION OF THROUGH-HULL FITTINGS AND CUTOUTS
1
BILGE THROUGH-HuLL FITTINGS
(F16.2.11.1)
J
(A) PORT UNDERWATER EXHAUST
PORT STRUT PAD
(С) PORT SHAFT LOG
(D) A/C PICK-UP
(E) DEPTH TRANSDUCER
(E) HEAD DISCHARGE (OPTIONAL)
(G) GROUND BAR
(H) STARBOARD SHAFT LOG
(1) STARBOARD STRUT PAD
(2) STARBOARD UNDERWATER EXHAUST
(K) STARBOARD RUDDER POST
(© STARBOARD ENGINE PICK-UP
FWD
—
(M) GENERATOR PICK-UP
(N) BAIT WELL (OPTIONAL) PICK-UP
(0) PORT ENGINE PICK-UP
(P) PORT RUDDER POST
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.11
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
10. MAJOR CONTROLS
A. GEAR SHIFTS AND THROTTLE CONTROLS
Standard on the 450 EB are dual hydraulic gear shift
and throttle engine controls. Read and understand
the information in the Owner’s Manual Packet for
your yacht model’s gear and throttle control.
For safety’s sake and as a good habit to get into,
always put the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
position and the throttle selector in the IDLE position
before starting the engines.
The gear shift levers have three positions:
FORWARD, NEUTRAL (center), and REVERSE.
The gear shift levers must be in the NEUTRAL
position when starting the engines. A detent can be
felt when the control is in exact neutral. Forward and
reverse positions should always be in the full
travel extremes in either direction for positive
engagement and minimum wear. Each gear shift
lever can be used independently from the other, for
example, when idling one shift can be put in forward
and the other in reverse for tight maneuvering. Shift
gears only with engines idling.
The throttle controls regulate the RPM of the
engines. Pushing the levers forward will increase
engine RPM. Regulating RPM of the engines will
control the speed of the boat through the water.
NOTE: Prior to starting engines, put throttles at IDLE
and gearshifts in NEUTRAL.
OPERATION
1. Throttle Levers:
Forward motion - increases Throttle
Aft Motion - Decreases Throttle
2. Gearshift Levers:
Forward Position - FORWARD
Center Position - NEUTRAL
Aft Position - REVERSE
MAINTENANCE
The gear and throttle lever bodies are made of
anodized aluminum. To clean them, a warm soapy
water solution should be used. DO NOT use an
abrasive compound.
1
ENGINE SHIFT AND THROTTLE FUNCTIONS (HYDRAULIC)
(116. 2.12.1)
РОВТ STBD
- wo.
A “
FORWARD | O
NEUTRAL
REVERSE
oo
ENGINE GEARSHIFTS
2.12
FULL THROTTLE
VARIABLE
IDLE
ENGINE THROTTLES
J
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
Shift selector(s) to NEUTRAL before starting engines.
Shift only when engine is at IDLE.
Reversing at high speeds can cause flooding/
swamping due to water being pushed over the
transom.
Shift quickly; easing into gear can damage the
transmission.
Hydraulic controls FORWARD and REVERSE
positions should always be in full travel extremes in
either direction for positive engagement and
minimum wear.
\. J
NOTE: Refer to your engine Owner’s Manual to
operate the throttle arm by hand for maintenance.
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
B. ENGINE SWITCH PANEL
Your yacht is equipped with an engine switch panel
located on the port side of the control station. This
panel provides the operator with the ability to set
and maintain optimal engine RPM for various
operating conditions.
The following is a simple overview of the engine
switch panel. Itis imperative that you read and fully
understand the information provided by the engine
manufacturer on the operation of the switch panel .
ENGINE SWITCH PANEL
(F1G6.2.13.1)
O O O
PORT STBD
WAIT ENGINE WAIT ENGINE
TO TO
START MAINT. START MAINT.
|
ENGINE CRUISE SLOW
SYNC CRUISE 2 IDLE
STOP CHECK STOP CHECK
ENGINE ENGINE ENGINE ENGINE
= À
ENGINE SYNCHRONIZATION
The engine synchronization feature is used to
control the speed of both engines electronically,
using one throttle lever.
fr N
The engine synchronization feature must be turned
off before docking or low-speed maneuvering; this
allows full and seperate control of each engine. Failure
to turn off the engine synchronization feature can
cause personal injury, damage to the vessel, and/or
the dock.
Adjust both throttles to the same position before
turning the engine synchronization feature off. Failure
to do so can cause a sudden port or starboard turn.
\. J
CRUISE CONTROL
The cruise control feature provides two adjustable
engine speeds. The cruise control can be used to
run the engine(s) at the optimal cruise RPM or
trolling RPM.
CRUISE 1 has a default setting of 2100 rpm.
CRUISE 2 has a default setting of 1200 rpm.
SLOW -IDLE
The SLOW-IDLE feature allows for lower idle speed
for operation in “No Wake Zones.” When activated,
the slow-idle feature reduces the engine speed to
550 rpm.
1
maneuvers. In slow-idle mode, propeller inertia can
cause the engine to stall when shifting into forward
or reverse, which can cause the user to collide with
the dock. Failure to turn off the SLOW-IDLE feature
can cause personal injury, damage to the vessel, and/
or the dock.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.13
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (RPM +/-)
The engine speed control (RPM +/-) switch allows
the idle speed to be adjusted in 25-rpm increments
by pressing the rocker switch at the top or bottom.
Pressing the top of the switch INCREASES engine
rom. Pressing the bottom of the switch
DECREASES engine rpm.
REFER TO ENGINE OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR
MORE DETAILED INFORMATION.
C. HYDRAULIC TRIM TABS
The trim tabs on your Sea Ray® are operated with
a rocker type momentary switch at the control
station. They are protected by a circuit breaker on
the control station breaker panel (See Figure 6.5.1)
which must be ON to use the trim tabs .
TRIM TABS SWITCH
(F16.2.14.1)
RUNNING
ATTITUDE LIST PusH
| HYDRAULIC TRIM TABS
(F16.2.14.2)
(A) TRIM PLANE SWITCH (AT HELM)
HYDRAULIC RAMS
(©) TRIM PLANE ZINC
(©) STBD TRIM PLANE
(E) PORT TRIM PLANE
(F) RESERVOIR FILL
(G) TRIM TAB PUMP
BOW UP
BOW UP
BOW UP
BOW DOWN
BOW DOWN
PORT
STARBOARD
PORT
STARBOARD
TOP OF BOTH ROCKERS
TOP OF STARBOARD ROCKER
TOP OF PORT ROCKER
BOTTOM OF STARBOARD ROCKER
BOTTOM OF PORT ROCKER
To trim the bow of your boat down, push the top
halves of BOTH rockers down in momentary bursts.
If you hold the rockers down, you will over trim
theboat and the bow will dig in. To correct over-
\. J
trimming, push bottom halves of BOTH rockers to
obtain desired planing angle.
The trim tabs on the transom of your boat can also
be used to trim the list of your boat (See chart
above) that may be caused by improper storage of
gear, too many people on one side or a strong cross
wind. Operation of the rocker switch should be
momentary bursts to achieve proper attitude of the
hull.
When running wide open, most boats do not require
any trim unless heavily loaded.
In heavy following seas or when running in an inlet,
best maneuverability is obtained with a bow high
attitude. To be sure the tabs are full up in the zero
position, push the bottom halves of BOTH rockers
for several seconds.
f A
MANEUVERING/CONTROL HAZARD
Ensure continuous visibility of other boats, swimmers,
and obstacles during bow-up transition to planing.
2.14
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
EFFECTS OF TRIMMING
(F16.2.15.1)
ZZ
===
x
BOW-DOWN (“PLOWING”)
BOW-UP (“PORPOISING”)
EFFECTS OF PORT AND STBD TRIM TAB ADJUSTMENT
BOTH NEUTRAL
NO CHANGE IN LIST
STBD TAB DOWN
STBD STERN UP
PORT BOW DOWN
PORT TAB DOWN
PORT STERN UP
STBD BOW DOWN
\. J
The trim tab pump is located on the aft bilge
bulkhead, mounted on the inside of the transom and
can be accessed through a hatch in the aft wall of
the master stateroom head. To service the unit,
remove the tinted plastic cover to gain access to
reservoir fill plug and motor parts. Hydraulic trim
tabs use Type A Dexron || automatic transmission
fluid, which should be filled up to the FULL mark on
the pump base. Add fluid with the trim tabs in
the up position only.
Your boat is designed to plane at a particular speed
and weight distribution. As speed decreases or
weight increases, the stern will settle lower in the
water and the hull will create and push a hill of water,
Increasing drag and requiring more power to move
through the water.
Hydraulic trim tabs are adjusted independently of
each other, enabling adjustment of bow attitude up
and down as well as to correct for side to side list.
Trim tabs can also be used to provide attitude
adjustment at lower speeds.
A PROPERLY TRIMMED BOAT:
(Operates at a correct running attitude of a 3 to
5 degree angle to the water (bow slightly up).
Reduces drag and increases fuel efficiency.
Preserves good forward visibility.
e Increases safety.
Use short bursts of rocker switches to adjust trim
tabs. Pushing switches too far at once may cause
sudden steering problems. Adjusting one trim tab
more than the other will adjust list caused by improper
equipment storage, too many people on one side or
a strong cross wind.
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.15
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
11. IMPORTANT GAUGES
A. TACHOMETER
| TACHOMETER
(F1G6. 2.16.1)
\. J
The tachometer indicates the revolutions per minute
(RPM) of the engine. (It does not indicate the speed
of the boat.) Your Engine Operators Manual
indicates the maximum full throttle RPM at which
your engine should operate. This must not be
exceeded or serious engine damage will occur. The
tachometer should also be used to determine the
most comfortable and economical cruising RPM.
B. QuAD GAUGE (VOLTMETER, OIL PRESSURE,
WATER TEMPERATURE AND FUEL LEVEL)
Your boat is equipped with a quad gauge for each
engine located on the gauge panel atthe helm. The
QUAD GAUGE
(F1G6. 2.16.2)
quad gauge displays, in analog format, engine oil
pressure, water temperature, battery voltage and
fuel tank level.
C. FUEL GAUGE Furl GAUGE
The fuel gauge indicates | (F16-2.16.3)
the amount of fuel in the
fuel tank. The most
accurate reading of the
fuel gauge is at idle
speeds when your boat
IS In an approximately
level position. At slow
plane, when your boat is
In a bow up position the
gauge will read
inaccurately because
the fuel in the tanks | J
travel to the rear of the tanks and away from the
fuel sending unit. Because gauge readings are
approximate, they should be compared to the hours
of use versus known fuel consumption (GPH).
-
D. VOLTMETER VOLTMETER
The voltmeter gauge (Fie. 2.16.4)
Indicates battery bank
voltage. Each engine
operating voltage will
range between 12.0 to
16.5 volts when the
alternator is charging.
Significantly higher or
lower readings indicate
a battery problem,
alternator ,malfunction
or heavy battery drain.
2.16
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
E. Or PRESSURE f
OIL PRESSURE
GAUGE
(Fic. 2.17.1)
The oil gauge is often
the best indicator of
engine problems or
difficulties. Maximum
pressure is controlled
by a preset valve in the
oil pump. Note the
reading which this
gauge records after the
break-in-period, as it is
the “norm” which can be
used as reference - /
during the life of the engine. IF ACOMPLETE LOSS
OF OIL PRESSURE OCCURS, TURN ENGINE
OFF AT ONCE. Continued running after loss of
pressure will cause engine damage. First, manually
check the oil level. If low oil level is not the cause,
consult your Sea Ray® dealer. DO NOT RESTART
THE ENGINE UNTIL THE PROBLEM HAS
BEEN CORRECTED.
Slight fluctuations in gauge readings are not
uncommon during operation and may be due to the
characteristics of the lubricating oil. Greater
fluctuations should be investigated. The cause may
be a clogged oil filter element which should be
replaced with every oil change.
F. WATER WATER TEMPERATURE |
TEMPERATURE (F16.2.17.2)
GAUGE
The water temperature
gauge indicates
temperature of the
cooling water circulating
inside the engine. Your
engine is equipped with
a thermostat so a
predetermined engine
temperature should be
reached soon after
\.
starting the engine and maintained thereafter while
the engine is running. Refer to your Engine
Operator’s Manual for proper gauge readings. If the
temperature approaches above normal on your
gauge, shut down engine at once.
G. HOURSMETER
The hourmeters measure cumulative hours of
operating time on the engines and generator. They
should be used to keep a careful log of engine
maintenance as well as performance data and fuel
consumption. Do not leave ignition key on with the
engines off, as this will increase the engine hours
on the hourmeter. Hoursmeters for engines are
located in different locations with varying engine
options. Each location is described below:
Standard Engines: Engine hoursmeters are
incorporated into the SmartCraft™ System View
digital display monitor on the gauge panel at the
helm. Refer to the SmartCraft™ owner's manual
for proper operation.
Optional Engines: Engine hoursmeters are
located on the system monitor available with that
engine. The engine system monitor is located at
the control station. Refer to the engine or seperate
engine system monitor operator's manual for proper
operation.
Generator: The generator hourmeter is located on
thwe generator.
H. MAGNETIC COMPASS
Your compass (See Figure 2.7.2), properly
corrected, will indicate magnetic North (not true
North). A compass must be adjusted by a qualified
person. The reason for this is that nearby
Instruments or objects containing magnets or
current-carrying electrical wires will influence the
compass reading. This is especially true if you add
electronic devices to the helm station.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.17
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
After your compass has been professionally
adjusted. You will be given a deviation card or chart
Indicating the correction to be applied when laying
out a compass course or making navigational
calculations. Keep this correction card or chart
at the helm.
NOTE: The compass adjustment is only good for
the equipment arrangement that existed at the time
of the adjustment. If you place different equipment
or remove equipment from the vicinity of the
compass, you cannot rely on the compass reading.
The compass must be readjusted by a qualified
person after equipment is added or removed from
the vicinity of the compass.
NOTE: The compass roses shown on navigational
charts have both true North and magnetic North
directions superimposed. Make certain you plot
course compass directions from the magnetic
North compass rose.
When not in use, the compass should be protected
from excessive and prolonged sunlight. If your
compass becomes sluggish or erratic, it should be
serviced by an authorized repair station.
To keep the plexiglass dome free from scratches,
remove salt deposits and dust with a damp cloth.
An occasional treatment with paste wax will help
preserve the dome surface.
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
I. SYSTEMS MONITOR
The Systems Monitor consists of a Display Control
Module (DCM) located at the control station and a
Bilge Interface Module (BIM) located on the bilge
component board. The DCM and BIM are
connected to each other by a coax cable and the
BIM is continuously looking at all inputs for an alarm
condition.
SYSTEMS MONITOR DISPLAY CONTROL
MONITOR (DCM)
(F16.2.18.1)
f A
SYSTEMS MONITOR
O Ser Ruy,
AUDIBLE RESET TF
ALARM SELECT ¢
J
Never ignore an alarm.
The Systems Monitor is connected directly to the
12 volt battery bank through a circuit breaker and
continuously monitors two emergency high water
pumps, two bilge pumps and the bilge heat detector.
The engine and generator functions are only active
when ignition voltage is turned on. The circuit
breaker is on the main DC breaker panel located
on the bilge component board.
The BIM collects signals from critical engine
functions, generator oil pressure, bilge pumps, high
water emergency bilge pumps and bilge heat
detection and transmits that information to be
displayed on the DCM.
The features of the DCM include a two line LCD
display with backlighting of the display, audible alarm
and an Audible Reset/Alarm Select push button
switch.
The LCD display will read in two lines. For example,
at normal operation it will read:
SEA RAY BOATS
ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL
2.18
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
NOTE: Some functions only read on one line. See
page 2.19 (DCM functions) for all DCM display
readouts.
Backlighting of the LCD is achieved by turning ON
the running lights switch. Intensity is controlled by
the electronic dimmer control. Both are located on
the control station switch panel.
AUDIBLE ALARMS
An audible alarm will sound to alert the operator to
look at the DCM and determine the high level fault.
Only high level faults such as critical engine
functions, generator, emergency pumps and bilge
heat detector will have an audible alarm. The forward
and aft bilge pumps do not have an audible alarm,
instead the DCM will display those functions.
AUDIBLE RESET/ALARM SELECT
The Audible Reset/Alarm Select push button
switch on the DCM is a dual purpose switch. It
enables the operator to reset an audible alarm or to
manually scroll the display during multiple alarms.
The Audible Reset is used to temporarily quiet an
alarm that is displayed on the LCD. If that function
Is not corrected within 30 seconds, the audible
alarm will sound again. Pushing the switch again
Will permanently quiet (turn off) the audible alarm
for that function. The LCD will still display that fault
until it is corrected.
Never ignore an alarm.
The Alarm Select is active only during multiple
alarms. For example, if the engine oil pressure,
forward emergency pump and transmission
temperature had faults at the same time, the
systems monitor would sound an audible alarm and
would display the alarm with the highest priority.
Each push of the switch will show the new alarm
and then the LCD will automatically scroll through
the multiple alarm functions approximately every
three (3) seconds. By pushing on the switch, the
operator will be able to manually scroll the LCD for
faulting functions.
To monitor critical engine functions and generator
oll pressure:
1. The 12 volt main battery solenoid switches
must be energized either at the main DC
breaker panel under the bridge steps or the DC
distribution panel on the port side just aft of the
galley.
2. Atthe DC distribution panel, turn the port and
starboard master ignition key switches to the
ON position.
3. At the control station, locate the port and
starboard START/RUN switches. Without
starting the engines, push the START/RUN
switches to the RUN position. The Display
Control Monitor (DCM) will display:
SEA RAY BOATS
ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL
NOTE: The generator and engines will have an
alarm as soon as ignition is turned on.
4. Start the engines per the engine start
instructions in Section 3, page 3.4.
5. Start the generator per the generator start
instructions in Section 3, page 3.7.
With the main engines and generator engine
running, the yacht's Systems Monitor is fully
activated. When the engine and generator engine
ignition is turned OFF, approximately five (5) minutes
later the LCD will go into a “Sleep Mode” and the
display will be blank. Engine and generator functions
are disabled because they are unnecessary,
however, the bilge heat detector and all pumps are
still being monitored.
The DCM Function Table (page 2.20) shows each
function, describes the function and shows how it
is displayed on the DCM.
If your Systems Monitor does not operate or display
functions correctly per the instructions provided,
recycle the circuit breaker by pushing the circuit
breaker to the OFF position and then pushing it to
the ON position.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.19
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
DisPLAY CONTROL MODULE (DCM) FuncTION TABLE
1
Oil Pressure *
Water Temperature *
Transmission Temperature *
Exhaust Temperature *
Generator Alarm *
\,
Engine Oil Pressure Too Low
Engine Cooling System Too Hot
Transmission Cooling System is Hot
Engine Malfunction, Exhaust Too Hot
Generator Oil Pressure is Low
Generator Stopped Running
Function Description DCM
Normal Operation No Alarms SEA RAY BOATS
ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL
BIM Coax Cable to DCM Cable Connection Fault DATALINK FAILURE
ALARM SYSTEM OFF-LINE
Forward Emergency * Forward Emergency Pump Under the PUMP ALARM
Master Stateroom Hatch is Running FORWARD EMERGENCY
Aft Emergency * Aft Emergency Pump in the Engine PUMP ALARM
Room is Running AFT EMERGENCY
Forward Bilge Forward Bilge Pump in the Engine PUMP ALARM
Room is Running FORWARD BILGE
Aft Bilge Aft Bilge Pump in the Engine Room PUMP ALARM
is Running AFT BILGE
PORT (OR STBD) ENGINE ALARM
OIL PRESSURE
PORT (OR STBD) ENGINE ALARM
WATER TEMPERATURE
PORT (OR STBD) ENGINE ALARM
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE
PORT (OR STBD) ENGINE ALARM
EXHAUST TEMPERATURE
GENERATOR ALARM
(No Second Line Reading)
* Function has an audible alarm
2.20 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
J. SMARTCRAFT
The Smartcraft System, located in the center of the
gauge panel at the helm, provides a comprehensive
boat information center. This system allows the boat
operator to monitor a wealth of critical operational
SMARTCRAFT SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
(F1G6.2.21.1)
23 “78 | 9 |3:08™ |
RPM RPM
19 0.0 № 00
FAVORITES
information which is displayed clearly and instantly
at the helm on the LCD display.
The system monitors water temperature and depth,
engine trim, boat speed, steering angle, system
preventive maintenance reminders, and systems
diagnostics. In addition the system can be integrated
with the boat's GPS, if equipped, to provide up to
the minute course, speed, and fuel-to-destination
information.
NOTE: The detailed information listed which is
standard on some models may be optional on
others, or may not be available on some models
based on engine and system configurations.
Refer to the SmartCraft™ System View owner’s
manual in the owner’s packet for all SmartCraft™
operating instructions.
SYSTEM CALIBRATION (FOR FIRST TIME USE)
Before using SmartCraft™ System View for the first
time the system must be calibrated.
If this has not been done by your dealer refer to the
System Calibration section of the SmartCraftTM
System View Owner’s Manual.
K. SEA RAY NAVIGATOR (SRN) (OPTIONAL)
Your boat may be equipped with the optional Sea
Ray Navigator. The SRN, located in the center of
the gauge panel at the helm, is an onboard computer
touch screen navigation aid capable of navigating
you through the waters and your boat.
f SEA RAY NAVIGATOR (OPTIONAL)
(FIG. 2.21.2)
4
0) ФФ®
NAVIGATOR
N
Some features include:
* Sea Ray Navigator (Charts, GPS and
Navigation)
* Contour (Contour and Depth of Ocean Floor)
e Tides & Currents (For your location &
destination)
* Weather (Satellite)
e Virtual captain (Owner’s Manual)
Help (Sea Ray Navigation Owner’s Manual)
(NOTE: Chart and contour data for your area may
need to be installed. Maptech® is continually
updating software and systems. Some other
features may also be under development and not
yet installed at time of purchase. Refer to the SRN
owner’s manual in the owner’s packet for all SRN
operating instructions.)
To turn ON the SRN press the “PWR” switch on
the face of the unit. Under normal operating
conditions the power switch on the SRN power
supply under the helm should be left in the ON
position.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.21
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
The SRN power supply is powered through the 12
volt electronics fuse block under the helm. If the
SRN fails to turn on check the power switch on the
SRN power supply and the fuse on the fuse block.
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
12. NAVIGATION AND ANCHOR LIGHTS
Navigation lights MUST be on while underway from
sunset to sunrise or in conditions of reduced
visibility. “Underway” means the boat is not docked
or at anchor. Trolling or drifting with engine off is
considered “underway” and navigation lights must
be used.
If you are anchored in open water, i.e. where other
boats can approach yours, you must display your
anchor light: a white light that can be seen from all
possible directions, i.e. 360 degrees.
Read the “Federal Requirements and Safety Tips
for Recreational Boats” provided in your Kit.
To OPERATE THE RUNNING LIGHTS:
Push RUNNING switch on control station switch
panel to the ON position.
To OPERATE THE ANCHOR LIGHTS:
Push ANCHOR switch on control station switch
panel to the ON position.
A. CONSOLE DIMMER
There is a DIMMER control switch located on the
control station switch panel which controls the
intensity of the gauge and switch panel lights. The
gauge and switch panel lights are energized when
the navigation running lights are turned on.
NAVIGATION LIGHTS
(F1G6. 2.22.1)
GREEN LIGHT
(VISIBLE 2
NAUTICAL MILES)
RED LIGHT
(VISIBLE 2
NAUTICAL MILES)
MAST LIGHT,
WHITE LIGHT
(VISIBLE 3
NAUTICAL MILES)
STERN LIGHT,
WHITE LIGHT
(VISIBLE 2
NAUTICAL MILES)
ALL-ROUND LIGHT,
WHITE LIGHT
(VISIBLE 3
NAUTICAL MILES)
If you opt to install additional equipment on the hard
top, it then becomes your responsibility to reevaluate
your lighting situation to make certain the navigation
lights on your boat meet government navigational
lighting requirements. You will most likely have to
raise the mast light. Consider the weight of the
equipment you install; be certain it is not to heavy
for your sport spoiler or optional hard top.
2.22
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
13. SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE LAYOUT (FORWARD)
SWITCHS & RECEPTACLES
(F16.2.23.1)
MASTER STATEROOM
FORWARD RECESS LIGHTS
120 VOLT RECEPTACLE
(©) WASTE LEVEL INDICATOR
(©) GUEST HEAD CEILING
LIGHT
(E) GUEST HEAD POWER VENT
(F) GFI RECEPTACLE
(@ BUNK INDIRECT LIGHT
MASTER STATEROOM
VALANCE
(1) GUEST STATEROOM LIGHT
(J) GUEST STATEROOM TASK
LIGHTING
hy (K) CO MONITOR
© MASTER HEAD CEILING
LIGHT
(M) MASTER HEAD POWER
VENT
(N) A/C CONTROL UNIT
FULL - DO
WASTE LEVEL = | SUMP | eee" 11 JS\ ANA NE "TIt DE A Tl NOTFLUSH
®
SUMP |]
O: т
FULL - DO
Na À
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 2.23
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE LAYOUT (MID CABIN)
1
SwITCHS 82 RECEPTACLES
(FiG.2.24.1) O
(4) VACUUM HOSE INLET
CO MONITOR
(C) STARBOARD SALON
CEILING LIGHTS
(D) FLOOR LIGHTS
(E) PORT SALON CEILING
LIGHTS
(F) SALON ACCENT LIGHTS
(G) 120 VOLT RECEPTACLE
(H) TELEPHONE PLUG
(1) SALONLIGHTS
© UTILITY ROOM HATCH
ACTUATOR
(©) BILGE LIGHTS
(LD) COCKPIT LIGHTS
(M) SALON LIGHTS DIMMER
(N) SALON INDIRECT LIGHTS
(0) STARBOARD SALON LIGHTS
(P) PORT SALON LIGHTS
(Q) A/C CONTROL UNIT
(BR) 1SO BOOST MONITOR
(OPTIONAL)
(S) 12 VOLT RECEPTACLE
(7) TV ANTENNA TUNER
(U) GALLEY LIGHTS (OVER
REFRIGERATOR)
(V) GALLEY LIGHTS (OVER
STOVE)
(W) GALLEY LIGHTS (OVER
\ COUNTER)
\ x COMPANIONWAY LIGHTS
Y GALLEY POWER VENT
C-POWER*
fharlo5 manne 1socarion soosuz rransronnen
ISOBOOST"*
_—
ML!
ir Y
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE LAYOUT (COCKPIT & CONTROL STATION)
1
N
SwITCHS 62 RECEPTACLES
(F1G6. 2.25.1)
(A) 120 VOLT RECEPTACLE
FIRE EXTINGUISHER MANUAL
PULL
© AFT STARBOARD COCKPIT
LIGHT
BAITWELL PUMP SWITCH
(OPTIONAL)
(E) AFT PORT COCKPIT LIGHT
(Е) COCKPIT/BRIDGE LIGHT
(G) GFI RECEPTACLE
(H) 12 VOLT RECEPTACLE
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.25
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
14. LIGHTING LAYOUT
LIGHTING
(F1G. 2.26.1)
BULB REPLACEMENT
HALOGEN 12V 10W
BI-PRONG
BULB REPLACEMENT
HALOGEN 12V 10W
, \ BI-PRONG
BULB
REPLACEMENT
BULB#CEC1141
BULB REPLACEMENT
HALOGEN 12V 10W
BI-PRONG
BULB REPLACEMENT
HALOGEN 12V 10W
BI-PRONG
\. J
2.26 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
LIGHTING LAYOUT
LIGHTING
(Fra. 2.27.1)
Na
BULB REPLACEMENT
HALOGEN 12V 10W
BI-PRONG
BULB REPLACEMENT
HALOGEN 12V 10W
BI-PRONG
>:
BULB REPLACEMENT
HALOGEN 12V 10W
BI-PRONG
No I
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
2.27
SECTION 2 * GENERAL BOAT ARRANGEMENT
LIGHTING LAYOUT
LIGHTING
(Fic. 2.28.1)
BULB REPLACEMENT
FUSE TYPE BULB
#12V10WPERKO #70-0
BULB REPLACEMENT
FUSE TYPE BULB
#12864 12V5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
FUSE TYPE BULB
#12V10WPERKO #70-0
©
BULB
REPLACEMENT
BULB#CEC1141
Na /
2.28 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
1. PREPARING TO DEPART
As the owner/operator of a Sea Ray® yacht, you
are responsible for the safe operation of your boat
and the safety of your passengers. Always be sure
that required documents, navigational equipment
and Coast Guard required safety equipment is
aboard and in proper working order.
GENERAL
1. Weather forecast - Safe conditions existing for
length of trip.
2. Passengers/Crew - Instructed in duties for
getting underway and fitted for a correct size
PFD. One (1) PFD for every person aboard.
3. Tool Box - Stocked with a variety of appropriate
tools.
4. Lines, Fenders and Anchor - Ready for use.
5. Float Plan - shared with friend or relative not
on trip.
6. Navigation Charts - Available for trip.
BOAT SYSTEMS
1. Equipment - Make sure all equipmentis stored
properly.
2. Radio and Navigation Equipment - Check for
proper working condition.
3. Bilge/Engine Compartment - “Sniff” the bilge/
engine compartment for fuel odor. Run the bilge
blowers for at least Four (4) minutes. Confirm
air flow through hull vents.
4, Bilge Pumps - Assure that all bilge pumps
function properly.
5. Shore Power Cable - Disconnected from
dockside power inlet.
6. Trim Tabs - Full range of motion. No excessive
play or binding.
7. Fresh Water Tank - Filled and sanitized.
8. Head System Holding Tank - Empty
9. Seacocks - Open (handle parallel to hose).
ENGINE
1. Fuel - Be sure that you have sufficient
recommended fuel for the trip.
2. Fuel System - Check for leaks.
3. Racor Fuel Filters - Check that filters are clean,
tight and free of water.
4. Fluid levels - Check engine oil and steering fluid
levels.
5. Coolant Drain Plugs - Secured
6. Batteries - Fully charged (Check water cell
levels).
7. Battery Switches - Check for proper working
condition.
8. Fuel valves - Open
9. Engine Alarm - Test. Should sound after a few
seconds.
10. Gear Shift and Throttle Controls - Full range
of motion. In NEUTRAL and IDLE positions.
2. WHILE UNDERWAY
GENERAL
1. Passengers/crew - Safely seated with PFD’s
on or immediately accessible. Keep passengers
safe.
2. Lines, fenders and anchor - Safely stowed.
3. Opeation - Gradual acceleration/deceleration
and turning.
4. Surroundings - Be aware of other boats,
swimmers, floating debris, etc. at all times.
5. Carbon Monoxide (CO) - Operate so as to
prevent buildup.
6. Weather - Monitor frequently.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
3.1
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
7. Navigation - Adhere to navigational aids in the
water and on shore.
8. Fuel - Check consumption regularly.
BOAT SYSTEMS
1. Trim Tabs - Bring boat to “On Plane”.
2. Navigation lights - On at night or in reduced
visibility.
ENGINE
1. Tachometers - Engines operating in safe RPM
range (refer to the Engine Owner’s Manual for
your specific engine).
2. Engine Gauges - Monitor continually.
3. Engine Operation - Check idle and shift. Listen
for abnormal noises and visually check the
engine compartment while underway.
3. RETURNING TO PORT
GENERAL
1. Passengers/crew - Instructed in duties for line
handling.
2. Lines, fenders and anchor - Ready for use.
BOAT SYSTEMS
1. Anchor Light - ON if necessary.
2. Bilge/Engine Compartment - “Sniff” the bilge/
engine compartment for fuel odor. Run the bilge
blowers if necessary. Check for water in the
bilge. Run bilge pumps if necessary.
ENGINES
1. Gearshift & Throttle Controls - Bring to
NEUTRAL and IDLE positions.
2. Tachometers - Idle the engines for five (5)
minutes to cool down.
3. Ignition - Depress EMERGENCY STOP/STOP
switches on the helm switch panel when engines
are cooled down.
4. Engine Operation - Check idle and shift. Listen
for abnormal noises.
4. SECURING THE BOAT
(GENERAL
1. Shore Power Cables - Connected to dockside
power inlet.
2. Fenders and Lines - Fenders in place, lines
tied securely to dock.
3. Equipment - Dry and stored.
4. Float Plan - Notify person who had float plan
that you have returned.
5. Canvas - Properly install canvas covers
6. Hull - Inspect for damage
BOAT SYSTEMS
1. Seacocks - Closed (handle perpendicular to
hose).
2. Helm Switch Panel - All switches in the OFF
position.
3. Gearshift/Throttle Controls - Inthe NEUTRAL
and IDLE position.
4. Navigation Lights - Turned OFF.
ENGINES
1. Ignition - Switched in the OFF position (lights
off) and master ignition keys removed from DC
distribution panel.
2. Battery Switches - In the OFF position.
3. Fuel Valves - Closed (handle perpendicular to
hose).
3.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
5. FUELING THE BOAT
Certain precautions must be carefully and
completely observed every time a boat is fueled,
even with diesel fuel. Diesel fuel is nonexplosive
but it will burn.
| NOTICE |
RECOMMENDED FUEL:
#2 Diesel Fuel
A. GENERAL
* Fuel during daylight.
e Fire extinguisher — close at hand.
e Mooring — boat tied securely to fueling pier.
e Crew — at least one knowledgeable person
present.
Passengers — unnecessary people off the boat.
* Engines — stopped.
e Electrical equipment, including blowers — power
off.
e Close all hatches, doors and keep engine
compartment closed to prevent fumes from
entering the cabin or cockpit areas.
о Smoking material — extinguished.
e Inboard tanks — grounded.
e Filler pipe — marked DIESEL.
Fuel nozzle — in contact with filler pipe to prevent
static sparks.
Avoid spills —fill less than rated capacity of tank;
allow for fuel expansion.
Trim — fuel weight distributed equally.
B. FiLLING THE TANK
Check the fill plate label to ensure that fuel is
placed ONLY in the fuel tank. The fuel fill plates
| FUEL FILL LOCATIONS
(Fıc. 3.3.1)
PORT FUEL FILL
STBD FUEL FILL
are located on the port and starboard aft
gunwales (Figure 3.3.1).
* Know your fuel capacity and consumption.
Record the amount of fuel used since your last
fill up, and compute the engine's hourly fuel
usage. As a fuel gauge backup check, deduct
the average hourly fuel usage from fuel tank
capacity.
* (Observe the “Rule of Thirds”: one-third fuel for
trip out, one-third for return and one-third for
reserve.
e Allow an additional 15 percent fuel reserve when
operating in rough seas.
e Listen asthe tank fills and stop adding fuel before
it spills from the fuel fill opening.
C. AFTER FILLING
Windows, doors, hatches - open.
e DO NOT wash spilled fuel overboard. Wipe up
any spill with rags or paper towels and dispose
of them properly on shore.
e QOniff test - if fuel fumes remain, operate blowers
until fumes are gone.
Fuel tank - secure filler cap.
6. BOARDING
e DO NOT overload the boat. Refer to builder’s
plate located near the helm (See Figure 1.6.1).
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
3.3
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
Wet decks are slippery.
You can be seriously injured if you slip and fall.
Wear slip-resistant footwear secured to your feet and
hold onto rails or boat structure.
Load to less than capacity in adverse
conditions.
Board one person at a time and give assistance
as needed.
Transfer gear and equipment by handing it from
a person on the dock to a person on board. You
can lose your balance and be injured if you
attempt to board while carrying equipment or
gear.
e Distribute the weight of equipment and
passengers as evenly as possible to keep the
boat balanced.
e Stow gear and equipment so that itis accessible,
but everything is to be stored in places so as to
prevent it from flying about if the boat encounters
rough water or weather.
7. PERSONAL FLOTATION DEVICES
(PFD’s)
* Operator must instruct all passengers on
location and use of PFD’s (See Section 1-
Safety, page 4 for type and usage).
e Children less than sixteen (16) years of age and
all non-swimmers, adults as well as children,
must wear properly-sized PFDs at all times
when aboard.
* ALL passengers should wear PFDs. By the time
someone falls overboard, it can be to late for
them to put on a PFD and fasten it properly.
This is especially true in colder waters, below
70°F, where survival time, before hypothermia
sets in, is measured in minutes.
о If there are passengers not wearing PFDs, the
PFDs must be readily accessible. “Readily
accessible” means out of the storage bag and
unbuckled.
e Allthrowable flotation devices (cushions, rings,
etc.) must be right at hand.
8. PASSENGER INSTRUCTION AND
LOCATION
Everyone on board must be told about the boat's
behavior from starting to getting up on plane.
* Before the operator does any high-speed
maneuvers or rapidly accelerates or
decelerates the boat, passengers must be
warned to sit and hold on and must heed the
warning.
The operator may have to make rapid changes
in speed and/or direction to avoid a problem,
with little or no time for alerting passengers. ltis
critical that all passengers be seated in the
designated seating areas and holding on to
prevent falling overboard or getting knocked
about in the boat at all times when the boat is
underway.
9. STARTING THE ENGINES
The engine operation and maintenance manual
furnished with your boat describes pre-start and
starting procedures. The following notes are basic
reminders and not intended to cover every detail of
starting. We urge you to thoroughly read and
understand your engine manual.
f A
DO NOT run the engine or generator in an enclosed
area, such as a closed boat house, as there is the
possibility of buildup and inhaling of carbon
monoxide.
3.4
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
1. Check battery solenoid
switches for ENERGIZED
position. Battery solenoid
switches are located on the
main DC breaker panel
under the aft bridge steps and
the DC distribution panel
located behind an access door in the port aft
salon. (see Section 6 — Electrical System, Fig.
6.8.1).
U PORT GEN stp‘
ENERGIZE
o DE-ENERGIZE (
2. Check the fuel tank levels.
3. Check the oil and coolant
levels. See your Engine
Operator’s Manual for proper
readings.
4. Check engines for coolant
drain plug installations.
5. Check seacocks for open
position
6. Make sure strainers are clean
and water tight (see Section
4 — Bilge and Underwater
Gear, page 4.11).
7. Check the bilge for fuel fumes or liquid. Do not
start the engines until the source of fumes
is determined and corrected and the bilge
area is safely ventilated.
8. Turn on the master key
switches located on the DC [IX a À
. . . WHILE ENGINE 1S RUNNING
distribution panel (see RR
Section 6 — Electrical
System, pg. 6.10). Listen for
alarms which indicate ignition power.
NOTE: Ignition switches on the control station must
be in the RUN position.
NOTE: If your yacht is equipped with the Caterpillar®
EMS (Engine Monitoring System), the Caterpillar®
gauges on the control station gauge panel will
undergo an automatic self-test on power-up. While
executing this internal test, the display will also
provide a visual indication by ramping gauges and
displaying all digits to the operator that the panel is
(or is not) functioning properly. Refer to your Engine
Owner’s Manual in the Owner’s Manual Packet.
11.
12.
After ignition power is [Г —=—-
verified, check the gear | ” “ N
shift lever(s) in the
NEUTRAL position and the
throttle lever(s) at IDLE.
SHIFT THROTTLE
Push on the top of the
ignition switches until the PORT EMERGENCY STBD
engines start. Do not =a ea
operate starter for more than
10 seconds without allowing
starter to cool for two (2)
minutes. This will also allow
the batteries to recover between starting
attempts. Once engine has started and
sufficient oil pressure is achieved, alarm buzzer
will stop.
Important: Check engine
RPM on tachometer as soon
as engine starts. Do not
allow RPM
to exceed 1,500. Move
throttle lever down to
decrease RPM.
Note: Alarm will sound when:
Engine oil pressure is too low.
Engine temperature is too hot.
* Transmission oil is too low.
* Transmission temperature is too hot.
Engine stalls.
Exhaust temperature too high.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
3.5
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
12. Check the oil pressure and
look at exhaust port to assure
that engine is pumping water.
13. Let the engines warm up at
idle and check for leaks. If
engine is cold, run for a short
period of time at fast idle
speed that does not exceed 1500 RPM.
14. Shut down the engines and recheck fluid levels;
top off if necessary.
NOTE: For general operation of the boat, its
instruments and the engine, follow detailed
instructions on “Engine Break-in” in the Engine
Operators Manual.
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
10. SHIFTING To Drive THE BOAT
Standard on the 450 EB are dual hydraulic gear shift
and throttle engine controls. However, your yacht
may be equipped with hydraulic or electric throttle
control(s). There are different functions and
operating and maintenance instructions which must
be followed. Read and understand the information
in the Owner's Manual Packet for your yacht
model's gear and throttle control.
Your yacht has start in-gear protection. For safety's
sake and as a good habit to get into, always put the
gear selector in the NEUTRAL position and the
throttle selector in the IDLE position before starting
the engines.
A. GEAR SHIFTS AND THROTTLE CONTROLS
The gear shift lever for each engine (twin lever
controls on port side of the control station) (See
Figure 2.8.2) has three positions: FORWARD,
NEUTRAL and REVERSE. The control lever must
be in the NEUTRAL (center) position when starting
the engine(s). A positioning indent can be felt when
the control is in exact NEUTRAL. FORWARD and
REVERSE positions should always be in full travel
Shift selector(s) to NEUTRAL before starting engines.
Shift only when engine is at IDLE.
Reversing at high speeds can cause flooding/
swamping due to water being pushed over the
transom.
Shift quickly; easing into gear can damage the
transmission.
Hydraulic controls FORWARD and REVERSE
positions should always be in full travel extremes in
either direction for positive engagement and
minimum wear.
Cockpit can fill with water if boat is moving forward,
when it is put into reverse.
Before shifting into reverse, shift to neutral, wait for
the boat to stop moving forward, then shift into
reverse.
«a J
extremes in either direction for a positive
engagement and minimum wear.
The throttle controls (twin lever controls on
starboard side of control station) (See Figure 2.8.2)
regulate the RPM of the engines. Periodically check
and seasonally lubricate the linkage with medium
weight oll.
NOTE: Prior to starting engines, put throttles at IDLE
and gearshifts in NEUTRAL.
OPERATION
1. Throttle Levers:
Forward motion - increases Throttle
Aft Motion - Decreases Throttle
3.6
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
-
ENGINE SHIFT AND THROTTLE FUNCTIONS
(FIG. 3.7.1)
PORT STBD PORT STBD
DON DN 185 FULL
FORWARD E e THROTTLE
NEUTRAL (Y VARIABLE
REVERSE
ENGINE GEARSHIFTS ENGINE THROTTLES
2. Gearshift Levers:
Forward Position - FORWARD
Center Position - NEUTRAL
Aft Position - REVERSE
MAINTENANCE
The clutch and throttle lever bodies are made of
anodized aluminum. To clean them, a warm soapy
water solution should be used. DO NOT use an
abrasive compound.
NOTE: Refer to your engine Owner’s Manual to
operate the throttle arm by hand for maintenance.
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
11. STOPPING THE ENGINES
1. Bring throttle controlsto IDLE | 3 5
2. Bring gear shift controls to |@
NEUTRAL position. I
SHIFT THROTTLE
3. Secure mooring lines.
4. Idle for five (5) minutes to cool the engines.
5. Press STOP
me ee
STOP STARTER
PORT BATTERY
LAI STOP
STBD BATTERY
6. Turn master key switches to
OFF.
MASTER IGNITION
12. STARTING THE GENERATOR
f A
NOTICE
М. À
Pre-start generator prior to getting underway as there
is a possibility that it will not pick up water if started
underway. Make sure the MAIN GENERATOR breaker
is OFF and there is no load on the generator before
starting it.
Sea Ray® strongly urges you to fully comply with the
manual provided by the generator manufacturer. The
generator is warranted separately by the
generator manufacturer, NOT Sea Ray®. Follow the
recommended maintenance and warranty schedule
in your Generator Operator’s Manual included in the
Owner’s Manual Packet. Generator abuse or
improper maintenance may adversely affect claims
made under generator manufacturer separate
warranty.
f в
DO NOT run the engine or generator in an enclosed
area, such as a closed boat house, as there is the
possibility of buildup and inhaling of carbon
monoxide.
\. J
(Remote control switches are located on the main
distribution panel or local switches on the generator.)
1. Check fuel tank levels.
2. Check oil and coolant levels.
See Generator Operator’s
Manual for proper readings.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
3.7
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
3. Check generator for coolant drain plug
installation.
4. Open the generator seacock.
5. Run the bilge blowers
for at least four
Ar
minutes before starting
and any time the | — rx =
generator is running. If =
fuel fumes are
detected, do not
start the generator
until the source of
fumes is determined
and corrected and
the bilge area is
safely ventilated.
6. While holding the
PREHEAT switch
depressed, depress
the START switch.
The starter motor
will run, thereby |. :
cranking the engine. centraron
As soon as the
engine runs, release
the START switch,
but continue to hold
the PREHEAT
switch depressed for 2 or 3 seconds. This
bypasses the Low Oil Pressure shutdown until
the engine's oil pressure rises to it's normal
running pressure. Release the PREHEAT
switch when the oil pressure reaches
approximately 20 psi.
7. Check generator exhaust port (stbd) to verify
that water is flowing. If not, shut generator down
and refer to your Generator Operator's Manual.
NOTE: To start the Westerbeke® generator from
the generator mounted controls, a bypass switch,
o o O rica
o ncn © CT ros
(Eero oT Jom eL Lo
Ose, (© Flee [TJ wm
o Г 7 © volt ReCENTACIF TET
START/
PREHEAT
PREHEAT/
STATUS
located on the side of the generator mounted control
box, must be turned ON. The bypass switch must
be OFF to start and stop the generator from the
DC main distribution panel.
READ THE OWNER’S MANUAL IN THE
OWNER’'S MANUAL PACKET FOR YOUR
GENERATOR MODEL.
13. SHIFTING FROM SHORE POWER TO
GENERATOR POWER.
1. Turn all AC systems
and branch circuit
breakers OFF. Turn
both main breakers on
the main distribution
panel OFF.
2. Start the generator.
3. Slide the source select
shuttle to expose the
GENERATOR
breaker(s) and turn it
ON.
4. Turn the individual
system breakers ON.
14. STOPPING THE GENERATOR
1. Prior to generator shut
down turn OFF all AC
equipment and
breakers including main
breakers and allow the
generator to run a few
minutes to cool down.
3.0
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
2. Stop the generator
by switching
START/STOP
switch on DC
distribution panel to
STOP position or
holding stop switch
on generator until
generator stops.
3. Leave stop switch
on main distribution
panel in the stop
position when generator is not in use to prevent
overheating electric fuel valve.
Note: After the generator stops, the multiplex
system must reset for 20-30 seconds and then may
be restarted at any time.
PRIME
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
15. STEERING SYSTEM
The hydraulic steering system is used primarily on
boats with inboard engines such as the 450 EB. Strict
adherence to the following guidelines must be followed
to ensure safe recreational boating.
Periodically remove the plug in the helm unit and check
the oil level visually. The oil level should be within 1/2"
(1-1/4 cm) of the filler hole.
The system must be filled with hydraulic oil
meeting Mil Spec H-5606 A. Refer to steering system
owner’s information in the owner’s packet for specific
hydraulic oils that can be used.
Failure of the steering system will cause loss of control
of your boat. Any change in steering such as
looseness, tightness, binding, etc., must be checked
immediately by your Sea Ray dealer.
HYDRAULIC STEERING SYSTEM
(FG. 3.9.1)
(©) TILLER ARM
(4) HYDRAULIC LINES
STARBOARD RUDDER POST (H) PORT RUDDER
© AUTOPILOT REFERENCE (1) PORT RUDDER POST
(OPTIONAL) (9) STARBOARD RUDDER
© SMARTCRAFT STEERING ©) JILTLEVER
(E) HYDRAULIC CYLINDER (© HELM PUMP
E) TIE BAR (M) FILL & VENT CAP
` J
Periodically check the mechanical connections and
linkages at the cylinder. Replace worn parts, tighten
loose parts and lubricate as needed. The steering
system is protected against over-pressure situations
by a pressure relief valve. Sometimes when returning
the wheel from a hard-over position, a slight resistance
may be felt and a clicking noise may be heard. This is
a completely normal situation caused by the releasing
of the lockspool in the system.
REFER TO OWNER’'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
16. ANCHORING
To anchor, bring the bow into the wind or current and
putthe engine in neutral. When the vessel comes to
a stop, lower the anchor from the bow. The anchor
line should be 5 to 7 times the depth of the water.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
3.9
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
ANCHOR ARRANGEMENT
(F16.3.10.1)
(A) DECK HATCH
BOW CHAIN LOCKER
(©) WINDLASS
(BD) ANCHOR
(E) WINDLASS FOOT SWITCHES
NOTICE
Use the safety hook supplied to ensure that the
anchor is held in place should the windlass fail. Do
not use the safety hook to support the anchor in a
stored position. The windlass should always support
the anchor and ensure that it is held in the roller device
securely.
A. ANCHORING ARRANGEMENT
The 450 EB is equipped with a windlass and an
anchor chute. Stow the anchor in the chute when
not in use.
NOTE: Before using the anchor, be sure the anchor
safety hook is removed from the anchor, the chain
stop is released from the chain and the anchor is
secured to the windlass chain.
B. ANCHORING
Proper anchoring requires knowledge of RODE and
SCOPE. Read this section carefully, understanding
the relationship between rode, scope and anchor
performance.
The rode is the line connecting the anchor to the
boat. The 450 EB utilizes an all-chain anchor rode.
f A
SINKING HAZARD - Anchor from the bow if using one
anchor. A small current can make a stern-anchored
boat unsteady; a heavy current can drag a stern-
anchored craft under water.
COLLISION HAZARD — Anchor only in areas where your
boat will not disrupt other boats. Do not anchor in a
channel or tie up to any navigational aid. It is dangerous
and illegal.
Na À
Na A
The scope is technically defined as the ratio of the
rode length to the vertical distance from the bow to
the sea floor.
Since you want to know how much rode to use when
anchoring, the formula is:
Rode Length
Bow Height + Water Depth
Scope =
Rode Length = (Bow Height + Water Depth) x Scope
о Scope depends on the type of anchor, bottom,
tide, wind and sea conditions.
e Minimum is 5:1 for calm conditions; norm is 7:1;
severe conditions may require 10:1.
Example:
Rode Length = (3 feet + 10 feet) x 7*
Rode Length = 13 feet x 7*
Rode Length = 91 feet
* Scope factor may range from 5 to 10 or
more. Less than 5, the anchor breaks out
too easily.
C. LOWERING ANCHOR
* Be sure there is adequate rode.
e Secure rode to both the anchor and the boat.
* Stop completely before lowering anchor.
e |f using windlass, refer to windlass operator’s
manual.
e Keep feet clear of coiled line.
3.10
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
| ANCHORING
(Fic. 3.11.1)
(A) BOW HEIGHT
RODE
(©) ANCHOR
(D) WATER DEPTH
TRIPLINE ARRANGEMENT
(Fic. 3.11.2)
Turn on anchor light when at anchor or drifting
(not under power).
D. SETTING ANCHOR
* There is no best way to set an anchor.
Experiment to see how your anchor performs.
* One method is to turn the rode around a bit
and slowly pay out as the boat backs from the
anchor site. When the proper scope has been
reached, snub the rode quickly, causing the
anchor to dig into the bottom.
* Reverse engine slowly to drive the anchor in
and prevent it from dragging.
Close chain stop (see Fig. 3.11.3).
E. WEIGHING ANCHOR
Run the boat slowly up to the anchor, taking in
the rode as you go.
The anchor will usually break out when the rode
becomes vertical.
Be careful that trailing lines do not foul in the
propeller.
(A) FLOAT
TRIPLINE
(©) ANCHOR
(D) RODE
NOTE: Use the fresh water washdown spigot in
the port bow locker to hose down the chain in the
locker after haul-in .
F. CLEARING A FOULED ANCHOR
A fouled anchor can test your patience and ingenuity.
One of the best methods of breaking free is to set a
tripline (see Fig. 3.11.2) before you lower anchor.
e Attach a line to the crown or head of the anchor
and the other end to a float.
The line should be just long enough to reach
the surface of the water, allowing for tides.
A polypropylene line is a good choice because
it is light, strong and floats.
e [fthe anchor snags, pull vertically on the tripline
to lift the anchor by the crown.
G. A FINAL WORD
An anchored boat is affected by wind and sea
conditions. Because there is no headway, there is
no control. Be alert! If leaving the boat, be sure the
anchor will hold under all circumstances.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
3.11
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
We suggest you read this section on anchoring
again and fully understand rode and scope and their
affect on anchor performance.
17. WINDLASS
The windlass is wired to the 12 volt system through
the 150 amp WINDLASS fuse in the main DC breaker
panel which is located under the aft bridge steps in
the cockpit.
The windlass facilitates the anchoring of your yacht
by automatically raising and lowering the anchor. To
operate the windlass the WINDLASS MAIN switch
on the control station switch panel must be ON.
WINDLASS SAFETY LANYARD AND CHAIN STOP
(F16.3.12.1)
(A) WINDLASS
W / SAFETY LANYARD
(©) ANCHOR
(©) W / CHAIN STOP
À. TO OPERATE FROM THE HELM:
e Make sure that the safety lanyard and/or chain
stop are removed from the anchor chain.
o Turn the WINDLASS MAIN rocker switch ON.
* Push the top of the CONTROL rocker switch
(located beside the WINDLASS MAIN on the
control station switch panel) to raise the anchor.
To lower the anchor, push the push the bottom
of the rocker switch.
f \
WINDLASS CONTROL STATION SWITCH
MAIN CONTROL
CA
B. l'O OPERATE FROM THE BOW:
Make sure that the safety lanyard and/or chain
stop (See Figure 3.12.1) are removed from the
anchor chain.
e Lift protective cap on foot switches at port bow
and depress UP or DOWN switch for the
desired result.
WINDLASS Bow SWITCHES
(F16.3.12.3)
FOOT
SWITCHES
| NOTICE |
It is important that the windlass clutch is tight for
proper operation and safety. Periodically check the
clutch and tighten if necessary.
To Tighten Clutch:
With the anchor in the stowed position, tighten the
windlass clutch by inserting the emergency handle
into the clutch nut (see Fig. 8.5.2) and turn clockwise.
\. J
C. TO OPERATE MANUALLY:
Make sure that the safety lanyard and/or chain
stop (see Fig. 3.12.1) are removed from the
anchor chain.
* Insertthe emergency handle (located in the stbd
bow locker) into the clutch nut.
e Turn handle clockwise to retrieve anchor.
Keep hands, feet, hair and loose clothing clear of
moving parts. Entanglement may cause severe bodily
injury (i.e. lose of fingers or toes).
Na J
3.12
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
D. MAINTENANCE:
f A
Make sure that the power is off before any work is
performed on the windlass.
Na
i WINDLASS (MAINTENANCE PROFILE)
(F1G. 3.13.1)
EMERGENCY HANDLE
CLUTCH NUT
CHAIN PULLEY
LOWER CONE
\. J
Periodically check the motor and control box
electrical connections, remove any residue and
cover the connections with a small coating of
grease.
It is recommended at least once a year to
disassemble the windlass and remove any residue
build-up.
Using the emergency handle ( located in the
bow locker), unscrew the clutch nut by turning
the handle counterclockwise.
* Remove the drum, upper cone, chain wheel and
lower cone.
e Wash down with fresh water and remove any
residue.
* Coat contact surfaces with a light film of
lubricant.
* Reassemble the unit and tighten clutch by
turning the handle clockwise.
NOTE: Use the fresh water washdown spigot in
the port bow locker to hose down the chain in the
locker after haul-in.
REFER TO WINDLASS OPERATOR’S MANUAL IN
YOUR OWNER’S PACKET FOR DETAILED
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
18. Bow THRUSTER (OPTIONAL)
The bow thruster is electrically driven and gives the
operator more maneuverability of the bow when
docking or maneuvering the vessel in narrow
channels or where space is at a premium.
f A
Bow THRUSTER
(Fra. 3.13.2)
VW Ss <
——————]]s—]]———.
\ IIS
BOW THRUSTER
\. J
To OPERATE THE Bow THRUSTER
Activate the bow thruster by turning the 24V
BOW THRUSTER switch ON. The switch is
located on the control station (See figure 2.8.2).
e By manipulating the the joy [
stick also located on the
control station (See figure
2.7.2) the operator is able
to move the bow slowly to
port and starboard.
The bow thruster motor is equipped with an internal
thermally activated breaker. The thermal breaker
protects the motor from overheating. When the
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
3.13
SECTION 3 * USING YOoUR BOAT
thermal breaker is activated the thruster motor will á
not operate and must be allowed to cool down for Dow J HRUSTER OPERATION
normal operation. (Fic. 3.14.1) BOW
THRUSTER TOGGLE
CONTROL
(SEE FIGURE 2.8.2)
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
THRUST
«=
3.14
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
1. BILGE
A. FUEL & OIL SPILLAGE
Regulations prohibit discharging fuel or oily waste
in navigable waters. Discharge is defined as any
action which causes a film, sheen or discoloration
on the water surface, or causes a sludge or emulsion
beneath the water surface. A common violation is
bilge discharge. Use rags or sponges to soak up
fuel or oily waste, then dispose of it properly ashore.
If there is excessive amount of fuel or oil in the bilge,
contact a knowledgeable marine service to remove
it. Never pump contaminated bilge overboard.
As a precaution against fuel spillage,fill fuel tank(s)
less than rated capacity. Allow for fuel expansion.
2. BiLGE Pumps
The 450 EB is equipped with four (4) bilge pumps,
including one (1) emergency high water bilge pump.
Your yacht is also equipped with a gray water sump,
with pump and float switch.
Each of the bilge pumps are equipped with switches
on the control station switch panel. These switches
have MANUAL and AUTO positions. When the
switch is in the MANUAL position, the pump will run
continuously. When the switch is in the AUTO
position, the pump is activated when there is enough
water in the bilge to raise the float switch to its
highest position; and deactivated when the water
recedes. The pumps should NOT be left in the
MANUAL mode unless the bilge is being
pumped out for servicing.
The emergency bilge pumps and high water float
switches are wired to the systems monitor located
on the dash at the control station (see “SYSTEMS
MONITOR” in Section 2 - page 2.17).
Whenever a bilge pump turns ON, either manually
or automatically, the systems monitor will display
which pump is active. Should the high water
alarms become activated, immediate attention
to the area indicated on the systems monitor
panel is required.
| FWD BILGE Pump & FLOAT SWITCH
(Fic. 4.1.1)
©
re
©
5
(4) BILGE PUMP
FLOAT SWITCH
(©) CHECK VALVE
(©) FORWARD BULKHEAD
f AFT Висе Роме & FLOAT SWITCH
(Fıc. 4.1.2)
(A) HIGH WATER FLOAT SWITCH (D) BILGE PUMP
FLOAT SWITCH (E) CHECK VALVES
© HIGH WATER BILGE PUMP
Na
CABIN BILGE Pump & FLOAT SWITCH
(FiG. 4.1.3)
(4) FLOAT SWITCH
BILGE PUMP
(C) CHECK VALVE
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
f A
BILGE PUMP ASSEMBLY
(Fıc. 4.2.1) (A) PUMP HEAD/
MOTOR ASSY
DISCHARGE
(©) IMPELLER
(D) WATER INLET
(E) LOCK TAB
N J
f в
SINKING HAZARD - Ensure the bilge pumps are
operating properly.
Run bilge pumps in the manual position only as
long as necessary to remove water. Running bilge
pumps dry can damage the pump motor.
J
Each pump is protected by a breaker on the main
DC breaker panel located on the forward component
board in the bilge.
MAINTENANCE:
Frequently inspect the area under the float switches
to ensure they are free from debris and gummy bilge
oil. To clean, soak in heavy duty bilge cleaner for
10 minutes, agitating several times. Check for
unrestricted operation of the float. Repeat the
cleaning procedure if necessary.
Inspect the bilge pump intakes and keep them
free of dirt or material which may impede the
flow of water through the pump. To clean the
pump strainer, depress the lock tabs on both sides
of the pump and lift the pump motor.
TROUBLESHOOTING:
If water does not come out of discharge hose:
1. Depress the breaker on the main DC breaker
panel located on the forward component board
in the bilge to ensure it has not tripped.
2. Remove the motor module to see if the impeller
rotates with the power on.
3. Remove any debris that may have accumulated
In the nozzle section or strainer base.
4. Check hose and connection on hull side for
debris and proper connections.
3. BILGE BLOWERS
The two (2) bilge fans (one each port & stbd) in
engine room remove odors and excessive heat
and provide ventilation through the hull vents. The
blowers are wired through circuit breakers on the
DC breaker panel located on the forward bilge
component board and are activated by a switch
on the DC distribution panel on the port aft salon.
The blowers can also be activated by a switch on
the control station switch panel.
Run the blowers when operating below cruising
speed and when vessel is at rest with the generator
running to dissipate heat buildup in the bilge.
BILGE BLOWERS
(FIG. 4.2.2)
4.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
EXPLOSION/FIRE HAZARD - Run blower at least
four (4) minutes before starting engine or generator.
| Check bilge and engine compartment for fumes.
Do not allow obstructions to interfere with bilge
blower or ventilation intake operation. Engine
| performance may be adversely affected.
MAINTENANCE:
The bilge blowers should be checked periodically
to ensure that all electrical connections are
secured in place and that the blower motors are
operating efficiently.
TROUBLESHOOTING:
If your bilge blowers fail to operate, depress
the breakers on the main DC breaker panel on
the forward component board in the engine
room to ensure that they have not tripped.
4. ENGINES
The inboard engines on your yacht are the heart of
your Sea Ray®. Proper attention to and maintenance
of your engines will assure you of many hours of
pleasurable, safe boating and will prevent
unnecessary engine problems. You must, therefore,
become thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the
engine's proper operation outlined in the Engine
Operator's Manual. A general maintenance program
consists of proper lubrication, cleaning of fuel filters,
fuel lines and air filters. When washing down, or
at any other time, take care that water does not
enter the air inlets. Water entering the air inlets
when the engines are not operating may go directly
into the cylinders, resulting in rust and possibly
internal engine damage.
The engines are warranted directly by the engine
manufacturer, not by Sea Ray”.
Sea Ray® strongly urges you to fully comply with
the manual provided by the engine manufacturer.
Follow the recommended maintenance and
warranty schedule in your Engine Operator's
Manual included in the owner’s packet. Engine
abuse or improper maintenance may adversely
affect the claims made under the independent
warranty provided by the engine manufacturer.
5. FRESH WATER COOLING SYSTEM
The fresh water cooling system is a closed system
which helps protect engines from internal corrosion
and provides more even distribution of engine
temperature. Change the coolant annually.
A. CooLANT RECOMMENDATIONS:
The standard mixture of water and coolant is a
mixture of 30% environmentally safe, non-toxic
antifreeze and 70% water, which protects to 0°F
(-18°C). This will allow the coolant to expand
properly and maintain normal operating engine
temperature. In colder climates, the coolant level
should be increased to 50/50, which protects to -
34°F (-37°C), for proper coverage. To find engine
coolant requirements for the specific engine
on your yacht, refer to your Engine Owner’s
Manual in the Owner’s Manual Packet.
6. ENGINE MOUNTS
The adjustable type engine mounts permit
adjustment sideways as well as vertically. Vertical
adjustment nuts lock up or down on the threaded
vertical stud, with a slot provided to allow side to
side adjustment on the engine.
ENGINE MOUNT
(Fıc. 4.3.1)
PLASTIC
COVER
NOTE: All bolts to be torqued to 50 Ft pounds |
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
4.3
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
IMPORTANT: The large adjustment locknuts
on these mounts must be tightened properly
to retain alignment. It is also advisable to spray a
protective coating on the studs and nuts to
prevent corrosion.
7. MARINE GEARS
A. REDUCTION GEARS
A reduction gear reduces the rotating speed of the propeller
shaftin relation to the engine RPM. This permits the use
of a larger propeller while allowing the engine to attain its
rated RPM, thereby increasing efficiency.
B. REVERSE GEARS
The reverse gear incorporates the clutch and
controls the rotation of the propeller. The position
of the clutch control or shifting lever indicates the
motion which the clutch and reverse gear are
transmitting. The center position of the lever
indicates neutral. Engine RPM should never
exceed 1000 when engaging or disengaging the
clutch. Higher RPM will result in unnecessary
wear and shortened life of the unit, and perhaps
breakage.
Marine reverse gears are hydraulically operated,
thereby making it imperative to periodically maintain
and check oil level. If the correct oil level is not
maintained, slippage occurs, causing damage to
the clutch plates. Too much oil will cause foaming
and erratic clutch operation. For additional
information see the Engine Operators Manual.
8. ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM
The exhaust system on Sea Ray® boats with inboard
engines is designed so that water from the raw
water cooling system enters the exhaust system
through elbows (engine side) where water and
exhaust are mixed. Water and exhaust are then
pumped through the mufflers and then overboard
through the exhaust outlet. Make sure water is
flowing from the exhaust outlets while the
engines are operating. Prior to every boat use,
examine the exhaust system fittings to ensure
tightness.
450 EB ENGINE EXHAUST
(Fi. 4.4.1)
© ©) () EXHAUST HOSE
MUFFLER
(C) EXHAUST BY-PASS
(D) EXHAUST OUTLET
\. J
A drain plug is located on each muffler. When
servicing or winterizing, remove the plug to drain
the water out of each muffler. Replace the plug after
all water has drained from the muffler.
9. VIBRATION & CAUSES
Some vibration is to be expected in your boat
because of the action of the engines and the
propeller. But excessive vibration indicates
conditions which must be promptly corrected to
avoid damage. Contact your Sea Ray® dealer
immediately if you are experiencing severe vibration.
The following are some conditions which may cause
vibrations.
A. FOREIGN OBJECT INTERFERING WITH
PROPELLER ACTION
Weeds, ropes, fishing lines or nets can become
wrapped around the propeller and/or shaft, causing
vibration and loss of speed. Always stop and then
reverse the propeller after going through a weedy
area to unwrap and clear away any weeds which
may have accumulated. Although reversing will
sometimes help to unwrap lines and nets, they are
difficult to remove without hauling the boat.
4.4
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
Always check for loose or trailing dock lines before
getting underway. When towing a dinghy,
remember that a long line may easily become
entangled with the propeller when backing down.
B. BENT PROPELLER AND/OR SHAFT
A badly damaged or distorted propeller or shaft is
an obvious cause of vibration. Even when the
propeller appears to be perfect, make sure it has
not been pulled off-center by the propeller key.
C. ENGINE AND SHAFT OUT OF ALIGNMENT
Although the shaft is properly aligned when it leaves the
factory, after transit and after the boat has been in the
water a few days, the alignment should be rechecked.
The shaft coupling is the connecting point between the
shaft and the engine and the alignment should be set at
.005 or less. Referto SHAFTS (pg. 4.9) in this section of
this Owner's Manual.
D. COUPLING Out OF TRUE
Although an extremely unlikely condition, check the
couplings if other efforts to correct the vibration fail.
Check the engine half of the coupling (with dial
indicator on the face) to see that it runs true with
the shaft coupling. Also check the coupling keys.
They must fit correctly to prevent forcing the
couplings off center.
E. ENGINE PART HITTING BOAT STRUCTURE
Engines are flexibly mounted to reduce transmission of
vibration to the hull structure. If some part of the engine,
such as the oil pan, reverse gear or reduction gear housing,
contacts a stringer, brace or part of the hull, vibration will
result. The flexible shaft log allows a limited side motion
of the shaft, but an excessive “whip” can cause the shaft
to strike the sides of the shaft hole or the shaft log with
resultant vibration.
F. OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES
Other causes of vibration include the following:
engine out of tune, a bent rudder, a worn strut
bearing, a component of the exhaust system
vibrating against the hull or improper contact
between shaft taper and the propeller hub bore.
10. OrL EXCHANGE SYSTEM
(OPTIONAL)
If equipped the oil change system, located on the
inboard starboard stringer, aft of the starboard
engine, simplifies changing the oil in the engines,
transmissions and generator. The pump is self-
priming and pumps in either direction. The oll
change pump is protected by the 12 volt OIL
a в
OrL EXCHANGE SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
(FIG. 4.5.1)
O
(4) TO STARBOARD
TRANSMISSION
TO STARBOARD
ENGINE
(С) ТО GENERATOR
(D) TO PORTENGINE
TO PORT
TRANSMISSION
(F) DRAIN/FILL HOSE
©) PUMP
(4) PUMP FLOW SWITCH
(1) OPEN/CLOSE VALVE
(J) STARBAORD INBOARD
STRINGER
\. J
CHANGE PUMP breaker on the DC breaker panel
on the forward component board in the engine room.
A. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
(SERVICE ONE (1) ENGINE AT A TIME.)
1. Run engines or generator for several minutes
to warm the oil and mix the sludge.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
4.5
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
On CHANGE PUMP (USED Оп.)
(Fic. 4.6.1)
(A) TO STARBOARD TRANSMISSION (E) TO PORT
TRANSMISSION
TO STARBOARD ENGINE SMISSIO
© TO GENERATOR ® PUMP FLOW SWITCH
(©) TO PORT ENGINE © usen oi
2. Selectthe first unitto be serviced. Turnthe valve
to the open position, in line with valve body.
3. Turn the pump on (switch position indicates the
direction of flow) and pump the old oil into
containers to be disposed of properly.
4. After oil has been pumped out of unit being
serviced, place the pump discharge hose into
a container of pre-measured fresh oil and
reverse the pump switch to pump the fresh oil
On CHANGE Pump (FrEsH OIL)
(FIG. 4.6.2)
(A) TO STARBOARD TRANSMISSION (E) TO PORT
TO STARBOARD ENGINE TRANSMISSION
©) TO GENERATOR (F) PUMP FLOW SWITCH
into the engine. NOTE: Fresh oil should be
at least 60° F (16% C).
5. When pumping is complete, shut the pump off
and close the valve leading to the unit being
serviced. Check oil level and adjust if
necessary.
6. Repeat for each engine, generator or
transmission to be serviced.
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
11. UNDERWATER GEAR
A. PROPELLERS
Propellers should be free of nicks, excessive
pitting and any distortions that alter them from
their original design. Badly damaged propellers
should be replaced, but those that are chipped,
bent or merely knocked out of shape can be
reconditioned by your marine dealer.
When doing extensive cruising, it is advisable
to carry extra propellers aboard.
BASIC PROPELLER CHARACTERISTICS
Propellers have two basic characteristics:
e Diameter
e Pitch
-
PROPELLER PITCH AND DIAMETER
(FIG. 4.6.3)
DIAMETER
(©) TO PORT ENGINE © USED OlL
\. J
Diameter is that distance measured across the
propeller hub line from the outer edge of the 360°
that is made by the propeller’s blade during a single
rotation. Pitch is that distance in inches that a
propeller will travel if rotated one revolution without
any slippage.
4.6
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
For example, a propeller with a 12-inch pitch, when
rotated 360° would, theoretically, advance 12 inches
through the water. Actually, no propeller applied to
any boat is 100% efficient. No 12-inch pitch blade
will, in a single rotation, advance a boat 12 inches.
This variance is referred to as slippage.
VENTILATION, ITS CAUSES AND CORRECTIONS
I
While often called “cavitation,” ventilation is
really a different effect. At times when a boat
enters or leaves a sharp turn, the propeller
seems to slip and lose thrust and the engine
may over-speed (Figure 4.8.2). This problem
is normally caused by air or aerated water
entering the propeller. (A damaged propeller
can also cause ventilation.) Ventilation can
usually be corrected by replacing the damaged
or incorrect propeller with the recommended
one.
| PROPELLER VENTILATION
(Fi. 4.7.1)
207
-
=”
=
OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE ^^
\. J
CAVITATION, ITS CAUSES AND CORRECTIONS
Cavitation is a phenomenon that occurs in all
propeller-driven craft under certain conditions. The
surface of propeller blades are not perfectly flat, and
as water is drawn through the blades to be
discharged aft into the propeller’s slip stream, the
water flowing over the curved surface of the blade
encounters areas of greater and less pressure.
In those areas of reduced pressure, air bubbles are
formed. When they move out of the low pressure
area these bubbles collapse. If they collapse while
in contact with an object, such as part of the
propeller blade or trim plane, the bubbles create
such highly localized forces that they erode the
Have only one (1) valve open at a time. Make sure
other valves are closed to prevent accidental
over filling.
Na J
surface of the object. In the case of the propeller,
such damage is sometimes called a “burn.” It may
be caused by an irregularity in the propeller’s leading
edge, and it should be corrected by reconditioning
the propeller or by replacement.
Cavitation is a normal occurrence in modern sport
boats, and prop inspection should be part of routine
maintenance.
PROPELLER TORQUE AND ITS CORRECTION
Some of the more powerful motors create a
considerable torque effect; that is, a twisting motion
causing the boat to ride with one sheer lower than
the other. This twisting reaction is caused by the
direction of propeller rotation lifting one side of the
boat. This causes an uneven drag, so that a boat's
bow may tend to fall off in one direction or the other
from the intended course given by the wheel.
Torque action may occur when maximum or close
to maximum rated horsepower is applied. Any slight
torque may be offset by shifting passenger or gear
weight laterally to the high side of the boat.
COUNTER-ROTATING PROPELLERS
On twin engine yachts, one propeller turns in a
clockwise direction while the other turns
counterclockwise in order to maintain a straight
course through the water.
f COUNTER-ROTATING PROPELLERS
(FIG. 4.7.2)
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
4.7
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
When removing or replacing propellers, be sure to
install the correct propeller on the correct drive.
PROPELLER INSTALLATION
For proper rotation, the installation of propellers on
Inboard engine boats requires the right hand
propeller to be installed on the starboard side and
the left hand propeller to be installed on the port
side. Install in the following manner:
1. Inspect the key. It must be chamfered so that
the corners of the key do not touch the keyway
fillets.
2. Install the propeller on the shaft without the
key in the keyway. Slide the propeller all the
way on the shaft until it seats. Mark the shaft
on the leading edge of the hub with a felt tip
marker and remove the propeller.
3. Install the key in the keyway and slide the
propeller on the shaft. If the key is not
pinned, tap the key back slightly as the
propeller slides up the taper. This will
ensure that the propeller does not ride the
key up the keyway end radius, thus forcing
the propeller off-center. The propeller is
properly seated if the hub is in the same
position as previously marked.
f Jam Nut
Shaft Thread | Prop Torque | Torque
Diameter Size Nut Ft. Lbs. | Ft. Lbs.
1" 3/4" Bronze | 100-125 100
11/4" 7/8" Bronze | 150-175 100
11/2" 11/8" | Bronze | 250-275 100
1 3/4" 1 1/4" | Bronze | 275-300 100
2" 11/2" | Bronze | 325-350 100
| 2 1/2" 13/4" | Bronze | 400-425 100 J
r \
NOTICE
If the jam nut and prop nut are installed properly,
the propeller should not loosen. If you tighten both
nuts holding only the propeller blade, the nuts
could possibly thread back on the shaft to the
cotter pin. It is important that the above procedure
be followed.
J
Install a board (2 x 4) against the hub
perpendicular to the keel and rotate the propeller
clockwise until one blade rotates against the
board. Do not put a board between the strut and
the rudder.
Install the large bronze prop nut on the propeller
shaft and seat the propeller with the correct
torque as listed on the table below.
1
TOP RADIUS IN KEYWAY
SHOULD BE 1/2 THE
FILLET RADIUS WITH NO
SHARP EDGES
PROPELLER INSTALLATION
(Fic. 4.8.1)
IMPROPER CHAMFER
ON KEY WILL RESULT
IN KEY RIDING UP IN
KEYWAY
CHAMFER ON KEY
SHOULD BE LARGER
THAN FILLET IN
||
KEYWAY
KEY SHOULD SEAT IN
KEYWAY
CORRECT FIT
KEY RIDING UP IN KEYWAY
INCORRECT FIT
ILLUSTRATION #1
© (&) PROP NUT
KEY
(С) ЗНАЕТ
(D) KEYWAY
(E) COTTER PIN
® Prop
(G) JAM NUT
ILLUSTRATION #3
ALL CORNERS OF KEY SHOULD BE CHAMFERED
S
ILLUSTRATION #2
2X4WEDGE
BLOCK
ILLUSTRATION #4
J
4.8
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
6. Install the jam nut and torque to 100 ft. Ibs.
7. Install the cotter pin.
B. SHAFTS
The shaft coupling is the connecting point
between the shaft and the engine (Figure 4.10.2).
The alignment should be set at a maximum of
.005" (0.13mm). A slight misalignment will cause
loss of power, excessive wear, noise and
vibration and should not be tolerated. When
checking for parallel coupling faces (the proof
of proper alignment), use a feeler gauge not
more than .003 to .005 of an inch thick (0.08 —
0.13mm).
With coupling faces brought together by hand —
not bolted — the feeler gauge should be tightly
gripped at all points around the edges of the
couplings. Next, hold the engine coupling flange
stationary and rotate the shaft coupling flange
N
| SHAFT MISALIGNMENT
(Fıc. 4.9.1)
TRANSMISSION
SHAFT
COUPLING
MAX .005 — —
| SHAFT LOG & STRONG SEAL
(F1G. 4.9.3)
(D) CARRIER SEAL KIT
(E) HULL
(4) SHAFT LOG TUBE
HOSE CLAMPS
\. J
90 degrees in either direction. The feeler gauge
should still be tightly gripped at all points around
the edges of the couplings.
(©) WATER INJECTION
FITTING
C. SHAFT LOG & STRONG SEAL”
The shaft log is a fiberglass tube which
provides an opening through the bottom of the
boat for the propeller shaft. The Strong Seal™
is connected to it by a short length of special
flexible hose which serves to absorb normal
shaft vibration. The Strong Seal” prevents
water from leaking around the shaft and into
the boat. Shaft alignment and straightness
must be correct to assure proper operation of
the Strong Seal”. Refer to the Strong Seal”
information for the seal carrier kit in the
Owner's Manual packet.
D. CARRIER SEAL KIT
Your boat is equipped with spare carrier seals
located on the port and starboard engine shafts.
Seal failure can be corrected by replacing the seal
with the spare seals provided.
SHAFT LOG & STRONG SEAL™ ASSEMBLY
(FiG. 4.9.2)
D
EN,
@
“
/
J
(A) HOSE CLAMPS (© CARRIER SEAL KIT (E) STAINLESSSTEEL ~~ (G) SHAFT LOG
WATER INJECTION (©) STRONG SEAL BANDS (9) HULL
| FITTING (F) FLEXIBLE HOSE |
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 4.9
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
| CARRIER SEAL KIT
(F16.4.10.1)
(A) SHAFT LOG & STRONG SEAL (D) CARRIER SEAL
SEAL HOUSING (E) SHAFT COUPLING
(©) COVER SCREW (F) PROPELLER SHAFT
\. J
To REPLACE THE CARRIER SEAL:
1. Clean any accumulated dirt and scale from the
exposed shaft. MAKE SURE THERE ARE NO
SHARP EDGES OR BURRS ON THE SHAFT.
2. Separate the two halves of the Carrier Seal Kit
housing by removing the screws. If there are
two lip seals in the carrier kit, move the
forwardmost one forward on the shaft until out
of the way.
3. Remove the retaining ring from the Strong
Seal™ using a small screwdriver (for a
spiral ring) or snap-ring pliers (for a snap
ring). Work the retaining ring around the
new lip seal and move the ring forward out
of the way.
4. Re-assemble the empty Carrier Seal Kit
housing onto the shaft just forward of the
new lip seal with the small diameter facing
aft. Leave the screws loose enough that
the housing can move along the shaft. The
Carrier Seal Kit housing is now ready to
be used as a lip seal installation tool.
5. Push needle-nose pliers or a hook into the
exposed body of the lip seal and pull it out of
the Strong Seal™ housing. Cut the old seal off
the shaft with wire cutters. BE CAREFUL NOT
TO SCRATCH THE SHAFT.
6. Inspect and clean the inside of the Strong
Seal™ housing and the newly exposed area
of the shaft that was under the old lip seal.
7. Push the new lip seal and installation tool aft
until the lip seal contacts the Strong Seal™
housing. Using a rubber mallet, tap the face
of the installation tool until the lip seal is
seated within the Strong Seal™ housing. You
will know the lip seal is fully seated when the
retaining ring groove is exposed.
8. Remove the Carrier Seal Kit housing from
the shaft. Re-install the retaining ring into its
groove in the Strong Seal™ housing.
9. If the Carrier Seal Kit came with two lip seals,
position the remaining lip seal back onto a
convenient location on the shaft at least 2"
forward of the Strong Seal™. Re-assemble the
Carrier Seal Kit housing around the lip seal with
the smaller diameter facing forward. Tighten
the screws and make sure the assembly is
firmly secured on the shaft.
NOTE: As the Carrier Seal Kit is turning with the
shaft and the Strong Seal™ is not, it is important
that the two do not touch.
-
STRUT
(FiG. 4.10.2) 5
(4) STRUT
(C) PROPELLER SHAFT
SHAFT LOG (D) BEARING
N J
E. STRUT
The strut is the bronze casting fastened to the
bottom of the hull to support and form a bearing for
the propeller shaft. A replaceable rubber bearing is
inserted to minimize wear and protect the shaft
where it passes through the strut hub. During lay
up periods, squirt castor oil into this bearing to keep
it from freezing to the shaft. Never use machine
oil or grease on rubber bearing. Periodically
check all strut fastenings to assure that they are
secure.
12. RUuppER & RUDDER STUFFING
Box
The rudder is the vertical flat surface aft of the
propeller that pivots about a vertical axis and
4.10
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
| RUDDER & RUDDER STUFFING Box
(F16.4.11.1)
(A) RUDDER STUFFING BOX (D) RUDDER POST
PACKING (E) HULL
As a safety measure, close all seacocks when
leaving boat for any length of time to impede water
(© JAM NUT (F) RUDDER
Na À
changes the direction of the boat through the
water. The rudder stuffing box prevents water
from leaking into the boat where the rudder
post enters the hull. Spot check for leaks
before and after using your boat.
13. SEACOCKS & STRAINERS
SEACOCK & STRAINER
(F16.4.11.2)
(A) O-RING
CAP
(C) STAINLESS STEEL SCREEN
(D) STRAINER BODY
(E) SEACOCK
(F) HANDLE (OPEN POSITION)
Seacocks and strainers provide cooling water to
the engines, generator and A/C units located
throughout the bilge area.
To open the seacock, turn the handle in line with
water flow (vertically). To close, turn the handle
against water flow (horizontally). The strainers
ingress in the event of water hose failure.
J
should be inspected frequently and cleaned out
when plugged. If operation of the air conditioning is
excessive it is important that the A/C unit strainers
are inspected more frequently than other strainers.
The seacock body should be inspected and
lubricated annually.
TO CLEAN THE STRAINER
Close the seacock by turning the handle against
water flow direction (horizontally).
NOTE: Some seacocks are equipped with
locking tee handles which must be loosened
before operating the handle
STRAINER MAINTENANCE
(F16.4.11.3)
ADJUSTABLE SPANNER
WRENCH (SUPPLIED)
(A) CAP
O-RING
(©) STAINLESS STEEL SCREEN
(D) STRAINER BODY
7
© E
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
Loosen strainer cap with the adjustable spanner
wrench provided. The wrench is located in the
galley trash can when the boat is shipped. Stow
the wrench in an accessible area so that it is
readily available when strainer maintenance is
necessary.
Rotate strainer cap clear of strainer housing.
Pull upward on stainless steel screen basket
handle. Clean basket and replace.
14. HYDRAULIC STEERING CONTROL
The hydraulic cylinder connected to the tie bar
ensures identical positioning of the port and
starboard rudders. Check that rudder arms are tight
and free of play. Ensure that fluid reservoir is up to
level. The fluid reservoir and pump are located on
the helm steering column (See Section 3 - Using
Your Boat, Pg. 3.9 for more complete information
regarding the hydraulic steering system).
fr
(Fıc. 4.12.1)
HYDRAULIC STEERING W/SMARTCRAFT™ SENSOR
(A) AUTO PILOT RUDDER REFERENCE ARM
SMARTCRAFT™MSTEERING
POSITION SENSOR
(© HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
(D) TIE BAR
(E) PORT RUDDER POST
4.12
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
15. 450 EB BiLGE LAYOUT
450 EB BILGE
(F16.4.13.1)
e
>)
/
к
(5)
(©
GN
SO
3 g a
Xx Y, ГЕ En \
E EAE
WWE / 1
Nb SA
Y > €
o ©
(A) BOW THRUSTER CONVERTER (1) SALON AC (@ AUTO PILOT RUDDER FEEDBACK
COMMON DRAIN (J) STARBOARD WATER TANK (R) SHORE POWER BREAKER
(©) BOW THRUSTER BATTERY (K) PORT ENGINE STRAINER (S) STARBOARD ENGINE FUEL FILTERS
(D) GENERATOR STRAINER (0D) STARBOARD ENGINE EXHAUST (© TRIMTABPUMP
(E) PORT ENGINE EXHAUST (M) STARBOARD ENGINE STRAINER (U) AFT HIGH WATER FLOAT SWITCH
(E) PORT FUEL TANK (N) CABLEMASTER TUB (V) GENERATOR
(E) COMMON DRAIN (0) GENERATOR BATTERY (W) PORT ENGINE FUEL FILTER
(© PORT WATER TANK (Р) GENERATOR MUFFLER (%) GENERATOR FUEL FILTER
\.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 4 * BILGE & UNDERWATER (GEAR
450 EB BiLGE LAYOUT
450 EB BILGE
(F16.4.14.1)
(A) STARBOARD FUEL TANK
MACERATOR DISCHARGE PUMP
(C) STARBOARD EXHAUST
(D) STARBOARD EXHAUST BY-PASS
(E) STARBOARD ENGINE FUEL FILTERS
(F) GENERATOR
(G) STARBOARD ENGINE SEACOCK
(H) AFT BILGE PUMP
(1) PORT ENGINE SEACOCK
(9) STEERING SYSTEM
(K) PORT ENGINE FUEL FILTERS
(LD) BOW THRUSTER FUSE
(M) BOW THRUSTER SOLENOID
(N) GENERATOR FUEL FILTER
(©) AC STRAINER
(P) AC PUMP
(Q HEAD DISCHARGE SEACOCK
(R) FORWARD BILGE PUMP
(S) COMMON DRAIN
(7) HOLDING TANK
© FRESH WATER SYSTEM
ACCUMULATOR BOTTLE
© FRESH WATER PUMPS
œ PORT HEAD VACUUM GENERATOR
O MAIN BATTERY CONVERTER
Y AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER
© MAIN ENGINE BATTERIES
A STARBOARD HEAD VACUUM
GENERATOR
© ENGINE SYNCHRONIZER
4.14
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 5 * FUEL SYSTEM
1. FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3 - Using Your Boat contains important
fueling information. Take time to read all the fuel
related information in the owner’s manual.
Fuel lines, filters and all fuel system components
should be checked at the start of each season and
periodically thereafter, particularly after any work
has been done aboard the boat which might have
affected any part of the system. Be certain that all
are in proper condition and that the entire system is
fuel tight. Each fuel tank has manual shut-off valves
on the top of the tank to close off the fuel system in
case of leakage or line failure.
A. FUEL TANKS
The 450 EB standard fuel system consists of two
(2) aluminum fuel tanks with a capacity of 200
gals. (757 liters) each, for a total capacity of 400
gals. (1514 liters). The port and starboard fuel
tanks are connected directly to the respective
engines through a fuel shut-off valve on the fuel
crossover board which is located under the bridge
steps. Fuel is supplied to the generator from the
port tank.
B. FUEL FILL INLET
The fill inlets for the fuel tanks are located on the
starboard deck walkway forward of the deck entry
doors.
C. FUEL VENT
Your Sea Ray” is equipped with a fuel tank vent
(See figure 5.2.1) for each tank which serves as
a pressure/vacuum release and safety overflow.
The through-hull fitting has a flame arrester,
making it imperative that you keep the screen
clean and in excellent repair. Replace the screen
immediately if it becomes damaged or displaced.
Periodically check the vent to assure that it is not
clogged.
450 EB FUEL TANKS
(Fıc. 5.1.1)
(A) PORT FUEL FILL
PORT FUEL TANK VENT HOSE
(C) PORT FUEL TANK
(D) PORT OUTBOARD STRINGER
PORT FUEL TANK SHOWN - STARBOARD FUEL TANK TYPICAL
„
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
5.1
SECTION 5 * FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL FiLL & VENT WITH SCREEN/ FLAME ARRESTER
(FIG. 5.2.1)
(A) FUEL FILL
SCREEN/FLAME ARRESTER
(STARBOARD SHOWN - PORT SIDE
TYPICAL)
2. FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
The quality of the fuel is very important for
satisfactory engine performance and long engine
life. Fuel should be clean and free of contamination.
Your fuel tanks should be kept full of fuel whenever
possible. This will reduce the amount of water
condensation and reduce the possibility of
contamination.
NOTE: In rough seas, allow approximately 15%
reserve when planning fuel consumption.
3. CROSSOVER FUEL SYSTEM
The crossover fuel system allows the engine to draw
fuel from either tank. This allows switching to an
alternate tank in case of fuel contamination or for
even fuel weight distribution. Each engine and the
generator are equipped with valves on the
crossover fuel board. The generator draws fuel from
| FUEL CROSSOVER BOARD
(Fıc. 5.2.2)
PORT ENG STBD ENG
PORT TANK
STBD O)
TANK | OFF
GEN FEED
STBD TANK
PORT
TANK | OFF
GEN RETURN
| |
the port fuel tank only utilizing valves on the fuel
crossover board labeled GEN FEED and GEN
RETURN.
The crossover board is located under the bridge
access steps on the port side of the cockpit. The
board can be accessed by lifting the hatch built into
the steps.
4. FUEL FILTERS
Primary Racor® fuel filters are located on the aft
component board in the bilge. To help keep the fuel
as clean as possible, Sea Ray® strongly urges you
N
-
RACOR? FUEL FILTER
(A) GENERATOR FUEL FILTER
PORT FUEL TANK FILTERS
(©) GENERATOR
(D) STARBOARD FUEL TANK
FILTERS
\. J
5.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 5 * FUEL SYSTEM
| RACOR® FUEL FILTER
(FiG. 5.3.1)
(A) T-HANDLE
TURBINE
(©) SEE-THRU BOWL
(D) HEAT DEFLECTOR
(E) DRAIN PLUG
® LD
\ J
to fully comply with the recommended maintenance
program consisting of proper lubrication and
cleaning of the fuel filters, fuel lines and air filters
provided by the engine manufacturer. Engine abuse
or improper maintenance may adversly affect the
claims made under the independant warranty
provided by the engine manufacturer.
NOTE: Use of any methanol, gasohol or alcohol
based fuel additive will damage the fuel filter.
A. GENERATOR FUEL FILTER
A Racor® fuel filter located on the port transom in
the bilge provides clean fuel to the generator. The
generator draws fuel from the port fuel tank.
B. FUEL FILTER MAINTENANCE
A major cause of poor starting or power loss is the
result of a clogged filter element or a fuel system
air leak. Check that the filter lid and drain plug are
properly tightened. Inspect or drain the collection
bowl of water daily.
TO DRAIN WATER:
1. Shut down the engine.
2. Loosen the T-handle on the top lid to break the
vacuum within the filter.
3. With a suitable collection container in place,
remove the drain plug and allow water and
contaminants to drain.
| GENERATOR RACOR® FUEL FILTER
(FIG. 5.3.2)
(4) GENERATOR FUEL FILTER
GENERATOR
(C) PORT ENGINE FUEL
FILTERS
\. J
4. Replace the drain plug and, if necessary, prime
the filter by removing the lid and filling the filter
with clean fuel.
5. Replace the lid and tighten the lid T-handle by
hand only. Do not overtighten.
Replace the filter element at regular intervals or if a
power loss is detected.
TO REPLACE THE FILTER:
—
Shut down the engine.
2. Remove the lid.
3. Remove the old rubber lid seal and dispose of
the old seal properly.
4. Apply a coating of clean fuel or motor oil to the
rubber lid seal supplied with the new element.
RACOR® FUEL FILTER MAINTENANCE
(FIG.5.33) ca
(4) T-HANDLE
RUBBER SEAL
(C) FILTER ELEMENT
(©) DRAIN PLUG
m
т
(>)
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 5 * FUEL SYSTEM
A
FUEL LINES
(F1G6. 5.4.1)
NOTE: VIEW SHOWN IS LOOKING UP THROUGH BILGE HATCH FROM BILGE
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents
are known to the state of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
(A) SALON ENTRY DOORS
FROM FUEL FILTER TO PORT
ENGINE
© (© TO CROSSOVER FUEL BOARD
(D) GENERATOR FUEL RETURN
(E) FROM CROSSOVER VALVE TO
PORT TANK (ENGINE RETURN)
(F) FROM PORT TANK TO
CROSSOVER BOARD
(ENGINE FEED)
(G) FROM PORT TANK TO
CROSSOVER BOARD
(GENERATOR FEED)
FROM GENERATOR TO
CROSSOVER BOARD
(GENERATOR RETURN)
(1) FROM CROSSOVER BOARD
TO PORT FUEL FILTER
(PORT ENGINE FEED)
(J) FROM FUEL FILTER TO
GENERATOR (GENERATOR FEED)
(© FROM STARBOARD ENGINE
TO CROSSOVER BOARD
(STBD ENGINE RETURN)
FROM FUEL FILTER TO
STARBOARD ENGINE
(STBD ENGINE FEED)
(M) FROM PORT ENGINE TO
CROSSOVER BOARD
(PORT ENGINE RETURN)
(N) FROM STARBOARD FUEL TANK
TO CROSSOVER BOARD
(STBD ENGINE FEED)
(©) FROM FUEL FILTER TO
STARBOARD ENGINE
(STBD ENGINE FEED)
© (P) FROM CROSSOVER BOARD
TO STARBOARD TANK
(STBD ENGINE RETURN)
9. Start the engine and check for any leaks.
10. Correct any leaks with the engine shut down.
It is recommended that spare filter elements be carried
aboard as contaminated fuel can easily plug a filter.
REFER TO THE ENGINE OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION.
5. FUELING PRECAUTIONS
Certain precautions must be carefully and
completely observed every time a boat is fueled,
even with diesel fuel. Diesel fuel is nonexplosive
but it will burn.
5. Place the new seal in position on the lid.
6. Remove the filter element by holding the
molded handle and slowly pulling upward with
a twisting motion.
7. Insert the new filter element with a slow
downward twisting motion.
8. Fill the filter with clean fuel, then replace the lid.
Tighten the lid T-handle by hand only. Do not
overtighten.
5.4
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 5 * FUEL SYSTEM
A. GENERAL:
* Fuel during daylight.
e Check fill plate label to ensure fuel is placed
only in fuel tank. Fuel fill plates are located on
the port and starboard deck walkway forward
of the deck entry doors (see Fig. 5.2.1).
Avoid spills.
* Know your fuel capacity and consumption.
Record the amount of fuel used since your last
fill up, and compute the engine's hourly fuel
usage. As a fuel gauge backup check, deduct
the average hourly fuel usage from fuel tank
capacity.
* (Observe the “Rule of Thirds”: one-third fuel for
trip out, one-third for return and one-third for
reserve.
* Allow an additional 15 percent fuel reserve when
operating in rough seas.
B. BEFORE & DURING FUELING —
Smoking material — extinguished.
Inboard tanks — grounded.
Filler pipe — marked DIESEL.
Fuel nozzle — in contact with filler pipe to prevent
static sparks.
Fill level — fill less than rated capacity of tank;
allow for fuel expansion.
Trim — fuel weight distributed equally.
C. AFTER FUELING — CHECKLIST:
Windows, doors, hatches — open.
Sniff test — if fuel fumes remain, operate blowers
until fumes are gone.
Fuel tank — secure filler cap.
Spills — wipe; dispose of rags ashore.
CHECKLIST: Never start an engine until you are certain that fuel
. . . fumes are not present in the engine compartment
Fire extinguisher — close at hand. or elsewhere in the boat.
Mooring — boat tied securely to fueling pier.
* Crew — at least one knowledgeable person
present.
* Passengers — unnecessary people off the boat.
* Engines — stopped.
e Electrical equipment, including blowers — power
off.
* Windows, doors, hatches — closed.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 5.5
SECTION 5 * FUEL SYSTEM
THISPAGELEFTINTENTIONALLY BLANK
5.6
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1. DC SYSTEM
The 12 volt direct current (DC) electrical system
derives its power from the batteries, which are kept
charged by an engine-driven alternator and/or AC
converter. The battery voltage is indicated by the
voltmeter on the main distribution panel and control
station instrument panel. Each battery bank can be
checked with the battery voltage test switch only
on the DC distribution panel. The batteries supply
power to the circuit breakers on the main DC
breaker panel in the bilge, then to the control station
breakers and DC distribution panel breakers in the
salon. The 12 volt dash systems are protected by
the ELECTRONICS and CONTROL STATION
breakers on the main DC breaker panel on the
forward bulkhead of the bilge. The 24 volt functions
on the salon DC distribution panel are protected by
the “CABIN MAIN” breaker on the main DC breaker
panel.
The negative terminal of each bank of batteries is
attached to the main DC negative buss ground
studs of the propulsion engines and the generator.
This “negative ground system” is the approved
system for marine DC electrical systems.
2. BATTERIES
The batteries in your boat have been selected for
their ability to furnish starting power based on engine
and generator starting requirements as well as their
ability to supply power to the DC system.
The following table describes the recommended
marine cranking batteries to install in your boat.
Application | Group | Volts | CCA*|Reserve| Qty.
Engines 8-D 12 1550 510 2
Generator 27 12 600 155
Bow Thruster| 31M 12 800 200 2
*COLD CRANKING AMPS
The main engine cranking batteries consist of two
(2) 8-D series, 12 volt batteries, one for each engine.
If equipped with a bow thruster, there are two (2)
31 series, 12 volt marine batteries connected in
| MAIN ENGINE BATTERIES
(FIG. 6.1.1)
(A MAIN ENGINE BATTERIES
BATTERY BOX
(C) FORWARD ENGINE ROOM BULKHEAD
\. J
series to create the 24 volts required for bow thruster
operation. The generator is powered by one (1) 27
series, 12 volt battery
Recommended batteries are available through your
local Sea Ray® dealer.
| GENERATOR BATTERY
(Fra. 6.1.2)
(A) GENERATOR BATTERY
GENERATOR SOLENOID
(C) GENERATOR
CONVERTER BREAKER
© TRANSOM
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.1
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
| Bow THRUSTER BATTERIES
(F1G6. 6.2.1)
(A GENERATOR BATTERY
TRANSOM
A. To REMOVE THE BATTERY CABLES:
1. Turn OFF all items drawing power from the
batteries.
2. Turn OFF the CONVERTER” breaker at the
main distribution panel.
3. Turn OFF battery solenoid switches.
4. Remove the positive cable first, then the
negative cable. To replace the cables, reverse
the procedure.
f в
* Never use an open flame in the battery
storage area.
* Avoid striking sparks near the batteries.
e A battery will explode if a flame or spark ignites
the free hydrogen given off during charging.
* The fluid level must be between the lower and
the upper markings.
* Only replenish with distilled water. Do not use
metal funnels.
* Coat battery terminal clamps with silicone
grease. Keep battery clean and dry.
Only use a battery charger designed to charge
automotive/marine type batteries when batteries
are disconnected from the boat's electrical circuit.
f =
While the engine or generator is running, the
battery terminal clamps must not be loosened or
detached nor should the battery solenoid
switch(es) be turned off. The alternator and other
electronic units will be damaged.
Na A
3. MAIN DC BREAKER PANEL
The main DC breaker panel (Figure 6.3.1) is
located under the bridge steps in the port cockpit.
The breaker panel contains switches for various
equipment plus the main battery solenoids.
1
Always disconnect battery cables before doing any
work on the engine's electrical system or alternator
wiring to prevent arcing or damage to the
B. BATTERY MAINTENANCE:
* Check the fluid level in the cells approximately
every 4 weeks, and more often in summer and
hot zones.
J
The bilge pumps, emergency bilge pumps, bilge
blowers, engine event recorder (Caterpillar
equipped only), stereo memory and systems
monitor remain energized at all times and
CANNOT be turned OFF with the battery
solenoids. The entire remaining DC system CAN
be turned OFF with the battery switches.
f A
Use ONLY Marine Rated parts to replace such items
as starters, distributors, alternators, generators,
etc. Do not use Automotive Parts because they
are not ignition protected and could cause a fire or
explosion.
6.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
MAIN DC BREAKER PANEL
(Fic. 6.3.1)
O MAIN DC BREAKER PANEL O
STBD
12 VDC —
CABIN o | | o CONTROL
MAIN Ll | STATION
IGNITION O [| 1 IGNITION
CABLEMASTER e) [|] ELECTRONICS
ACCESSORY o [|] OIL CHANGE
|| PUMP
SMARTCRAFT/ o [| SMARTCRAFT/
ELECT CONTROL Ll | ELECT CONTROL
ENGINE o [|] ENGINE
O UNSWITCHED | Ц UNSWITCHED ©
er o mt
PUMP La. STEREO MEMORY
BRIDGE STEREO (С) o SYSTEMS
MEMORY NL Ц MONITOR
FWD EMERGENCY o т | 1 FWD
PUMP [| Ц SUMP PUMP
FWD Tr CT EMERGENCY
BILGE PUMP © [|] BILGE PUMP
AFT EMERGENCY 1
PUMP O | || O AFT PUMP
BLOWER #1 O LI O BLOWER #2
MAIN BATTERY SOLENOIDS
O WINDLASS - — x O
OO — uercizz — BELO
и \ / \ /7 N ça 2
Ne J J y
———— DE-ENERGIZE
SWIM « O
PLATFORM
CA CAUTION )
IF SWITCH IS TURNED OFF
WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING
ALTERNATOR WILL BE DAMAGED
2 ©)
NOTE: Panel layout and labeling are subject to variance due to customized optional accessories and equipment.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.3
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4. BATTERY SWITCHES AND
SOLENOIDS
The main engine battery and generator switches
are located on the Main DC Breaker Panel located
under the bridge steps and on the DC distribution
panel in the port salon (See figure 6.10.1). When
the switches are in the OFF position all current
to the engines and accessories are turned off
except power to the bilge pumps and other line
side circuits (i.e. systems monitor, blowers, etc.).
The battery switches must be ON to start the
engines or generator. Turn battery solenoids OFF
when leaving boat for extended duration.
| MAIN BATTERY AND GENERATOR SWITCHES
(FIG. 6.4.1)
o) MAIN DC BREAKER PANEL o]
O)
GEN STBD
ENERGIZE
DE-ENERGIZE
O
©
A. MAIN ENGINE BATTERY SOLENOIDS
The main battery solenoids are located behind
the salon entertainment center along with the main
battery solenoid fuses.
| MAIN ENGINE BATTERY LATCHING SOLENOID
(FIG. 6.4.2)
=]
5
(A) PORT BATTERY SOLENOID
STARBOARD BATTERY
SOLENOID
© MAIN BATTERY SOLENOID
FUSE BLOCK
© SALON ENTERTAINMENT
CABINET
B. GENERATOR SOLENOID
The latching solenoid for the generator is located
on the starboard side of the generator platform.
(GENERATOR LLATCHING SOLENOID
(F1G. 6.4.3)
(3) GENERATOR LATCHING SOLENOID
GENERATOR CONVERTER BREAKER
© GENERATOR BATTERY
6.4
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
C. Bow THRUSTER SOLENOID
The latching solenoid for the bow thruster is located
on the port transom aft of the port fuel tank.
Bow THRUSTER LATCHING SOLENOID
(FIG. 6.5.1)
(A) BOW THRUSTER COVERTER
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
25 AMP ATO FUSE
©) 500 AMP MAIN FUSE
(E) CONTROL FUSES
D. WINDLASS SOLENOID
The latching solenoid for the windlass is located
inside the DC Breaker Panel under the bridge steps.
5. CONTROL STATION BREAKER
PANEL
The control station breaker panel is located behind
an access door on the port side of the control
station.
In the event one of the breakers trip, determine
and correct the fault, then reset by depressing
the tripped breaker.
a“ A
CONTROL STATION BREAKER PANEL
(Fıc. 6.5.2)
®)
O O
O O)
\_ J
6. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FUSE BLOCKS
& BREAKERS
Fuse blocks utilizing automotive type blade fuses
are used to provide overload protection.
The electronics fuse block is located behind the
ice maker forward of the control station.
f \
ELECTRONICS FUSE BLOCK AT CONTROL STATION
(FIG. 6.5.3)
O
—
©
—
©
1 VHF 2 GPS
3 DEPTH/SPEED 4 CHART PLOTTER
©
5 RADAR 6 AUTOPILOT
|
|
||» =)
|| ©)
<= e
Lie SL
7 CELLULAR PHONE 8 B&G NETWORK
9 ACCESSORY 10 ACCESSORY
\. J
There is also an accessory fuse block on the
accessory board located behind the distribution
panel in the salon.
| Fuse BLock, TypicAL
(F1G. 6.5.4)
a LS É
7
Te Y
ce
So
Na A
In the event it becomes necessary to replace a
fuse or an electrical breaker, REPLACE THE
FUSE OR BREAKER ONLY WITH A FUSE OR
BREAKER OF THE SAME RATING. The amperage
is marked on the fuse or breaker.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.5
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
If a fuse or breaker is replaced with one of lower
amperage, it will be insufficient to carry the electrical
load of the equipment it is connected to and cause
nuisance tripping or blowing.
Conversely if a fuse or breaker is replaced with
one of higher amperage, it will not provide
adequate protection against an electrical
malfunction and could create a possible fire
hazard. Some of the various types of breakers
used on your boat are as follows:
This type is an in-line fuse ( |
holder and uses an
automotive-type blade fuse.
This type of breaker is found
on the control station DC
breaker panel located behind
the access panel below the
control station switch panel.
These breakers protect the
trim tabs, wipers, windshield * A
vent, navigation lights, spot
light, engine synchronizer, horn, instrument lights,
12V receptacle and accessories.
f =
This type of breaker is typically
found on the main distribution
panel. It selects the electrical
power source, either from the
generator or from shore
power.
This type of breaker is found
on the main DC breaker
panel. ltis used to protect the
bilge pumps, sump pumps,
bilge blowers, control station
main, electronics, systems
monitor, oil change pump,
DE-ENERGIZING
~
SLOT FOR
stereo memory and accessories. This is a manual
reset breaker. It can be turned off by inserting a
small screwdriver in the slot on the toggle switch.
This type is a current limiting f )
fuse which is used to isolate
faults in battery operated
systems and equipment
(motor circuits, panel
feeders, etc.).
7.12 VOLT SYSTEM
A 12 volt converter in the bilge supplies power to
the 12 volt equipment on board (i.e. control station
electronics).
A.12 VoLT ACCESSORY RECEPTACLE
The 450 EB is equipped with two (2) 12 volt
accessory receptacles. One is located on the
port side of the control station and the other is on
the port salon wall under the TV tuner. The
receptacle is to be used with any 12 volt
accessories using this type of plug.
12 VOLT ACCESSORY RECEPTACLE
(F1G. 6.6.1)
т
CONTROL STATION A]
/ PORT SALON
/
/
\. J
6.6
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
8. EMERGENCY START SYSTEM
The emergency start system utilizes a momentary
switch located on the control station switch panel
and an emergency start solenoid located on the
forward component board in the bilge.
Holding the switch energizes the solenoid which
parallels the batteries to assist in starting. Use the
emergency start system when the charge of one
bank of batteries is insufficient to start its
corresponding engine.
To engage the engine emergency start system, start
whichever engine has sufficient battery power, then
hold the emergency start switch while starting the
other engine.
The emergency start solenoid is located on the
forward component board in the bilge.
9. ELECTRONICS CIRCUIT
The 50 amp electronics circuit utilizes the
ELECTRONICS breaker on the main DC breaker
panel under the bridge steps to energize the
electronics fuse block at the control station. There
IS a static ground buss located at the control station
for connection of electronic equipment static
grounds only, not for current carrying grounds.
10. AC SYSTEM
The 450 EB’s AC standard electrical system
operates on a 240V/60 cycle, 50 amp shore power
system.
f A
EXTREME HAZARD - Swimming near a boat operating
on AC electrical system can lead to severe shock and
death. Never swim or allow swimming when AC system
Is in use.
\. J
Take time to become familiar with the Main
Distribution Panel in the port salon.
NOTE: Actual usage of equipment will depend on
the amperage output of the power source available.
Line voltage from the generator or shore power is
shown by the voltmeters on the AC main distribution
panel. The ammeters indicate amperes being
drawn through the selected power source's circuit
breakers on the main distribution panel.
The main breakers located on the AC Main
Distribution Panel are equipped with a source
selector slide to prevent the generator and shore
power from being energized at the same time and
damaging the electrical system. Both breakers must
be in the OFF position before switching to an
alternate power source.
The main breakers may trip if there is a surge in
line voltage, an electrical storm or an onboard
system overload. The main breaker interrupts both
the neutral and hot feeds in the AC circuitto prevent
equipment damage due to internal overloads and
external surges.
The 240 volt system wiring consists of four (4) color-
coded wires. The black and black/red wires are the
“hot” feeds, the white is the common, or neutral,
and the green wire is the safety ground. The shore
main circuit breakers protect the black hot feed
wires. All branch breakers and switches for AC
equipment are installed on the “hot” wires. The green
conductor of the shore power is connected directly
to the shield of theisolation transformer and is not
grounded on the boat.
Never operate 240 volt shore power at less than
220 volts.
The 120 volt wiring installed on Sea Ray® boats
consists of three (3) color-coded wires. The black
wire is the “hot” feed, white is the common, or
neutral, and the green wire is the ground. All branch
breakers and switches for AC equipment are
installed on the “hot” wire. The green conductor of
the shore power is connected through the galvanic
Never operate 120 volt shore power at less than 110
volts.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.7
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
isolator and then connected to the AC grounding
buss bar behind the main distribution panel.
11. DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL
Your boat is equipped with a DC distribution panel
located on the port salon. The breaker panel
contains switches for various equipment
throughout the boat plus the main battery switch
and generator switch.
The bilge pumps, emergency bilge pumps,
blowers, engine event recorder, CO monitors,
stereo memory and engine ECM remain
energized at all times and CANNOT be turned
OFF with the battery solenoids. The entire
remaining DC system CAN be turned OFF with
the battery switches.
Under no circumstances override the source
select system.
12. SERVICING THE MAIN
DISTRIBUTION PANEL
NOTE: Servicing should be referred to a qualified
electrician.
A. To REPLACE A FAULTY COMPONENT ÓN
THE MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL:
Turn all breakers OFF.
Make sure the generator is OFF.
Unplug the shore power.
Remove screws from all sides except the
hinged side of panel. The main distribution panel
is hinged to swing open for servicing.
5. Reverse the procedure for closing the panel.
А © № =
6.8
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
f NN
AC MAI DISTRIBUTION PANEL
(FiG. 6.9.1)
fo O о о о \
240 VOLTS AC
MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL
e T DITIONER [ ]
° 400 200 оо , 100 200 30 O [ | |] O PUMPIRELAY O O STOVE
FWD AIR
о O CONDITIONER O | Jo WATER HEATER o
20 30
o 40 50
SALON AIR
AC AMPERES a E
POWER POWER Ш 120 VOLTS AC
GENERATOR SHORE
O FE O | | © GALLEY SYSTEMS STBD SYSTEMS O
- O PORT SYSTEMS BILGE/COCKPIT
© CONVERTER MIICROWAVE
| o
BOW THRUSTER
о CONVERTER REFRIGERATOR/
N A FREEZER
—
POWER ABLE TURN OFF PANEL MAIN BREARER о [Je ACCESSORY WASHER/DRYER
AND BREAKER AT DOCKSIDE RECEPTACLE OR LS o
SHORE POWER CABLE MAY BE DAMAGED.
LO O о о о J
NOTE: Panel layout and labeling are subject to variance due to customized optional accessories and equipment upgrades
\_ J
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.9
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
~
DC MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL
(тс. 6.10.1)
(7
O О 12 VOLTS DC o o
WATER LEVEL WASTE SYSTEM CONTROL
PORT FULL
16 20 74 28 20 30 DO NOT FLUSH
g 7 22 o 0
1/2
DCVOLTS DC Amperes
EMPTY
STBD POWER
BATTERY NOTICE
VOLTAGE TEST INDICATOR ON - NORMAL
MAIN BATTE RY INDICATOR OFF - CHECK SEACOCK
SEE O $ o
SOLENOIDS OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS DISCHARGE OESEWAGE DIRECTLY OVERBOARD
GENERATOR INSTRUCTIONS OF OVERBOARD DISCHARGE VALVES
PORT GEN STBD BILGE START/
— ENERGIZE — ——— BLOWERS ON PREHEAT
Г ] | | | FWD CABIN
O) O GUEST HEAD O O LIGHTING
о RUN O
STATUS | | Jo MASTER HEAD O | Jo LIGHTING
— | o | | O BILGE/COCKPIT
DE-ENERGIZE STOP! O O DISCHARGE PUMP LIGHTING
PRIME Cb —
MASTER IGNITION о (Je sora contRoLLER | © Г Jo PONERVERTS
PORT A Г C1 ENTERTAINMENT
of] Tom OL | Joa
IF SWITCH IS TURNED OFF (D —
WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING ~~ | O O REFRIGERATOR/
ALTERNATOR WILL BE DAMAGED O [|] O whl | _ FREEZER
— = r | 1 SATELLITE TV
O O 12 VOLT RECEPTACLE O [| O SYSTEM
o[ Jo reer o[ Jo wer
\ © O O о)
NOTE: Panel layout and labeling are subject to variance due to customized optional accessories and equipment upgrades
J
6.10
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
13. SHORE POWER
A. ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
Your yacht is equipped with an isolation transformer.
The boat's electrical system and grounding
conductor are not actually connected to the dockside
system. The lsolation Transformer transfers power
from the dockside electrical system to the boat's
electrical system by magnetic coupling. This means
there is no direct electrical connection between the
earth-grounded shore AC power and boat AC power.
Isolating the power this way has several benefits
which are listed below:
1. Eliminates shock hazards to people swimming
around the boat.
2. Prevents reverse polarity due to a miss-wired
shore power pedestal providing futher protection
to people onboard as well as sensitive AC
appliances.
3. Prevents galvanic current corrosion due to the
direct connection to AC shore power.
REFER TO OWNERS MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
B. Iso Boost TRANSFORMER (OPTIONAL)
The IsoBoost Transformer combines a shoreline
Isolation Transformer, described above, with a
voltage sensing and switching circuit providing the
ability to automatically increase the line voltage on
your boat, all in a single unit. The isolation
transformer completely isolates input power from
output power giving you an improved degree of
safety and preventing galvanic current corrosion due
to the direct connection to AChore power. The
IsoBoost increases the boat's voltage when it falls
below 204 volts due to low shoreline voltage. The
IsoBoost gives you the reliability and assurance that
adequate voltage is provided for all the AC equipment
on the boat.
IsoBoosT TRANSFORMER FEATURES:
1. The output voltage is boosted (increased) by
15% if the suppied voltage is to low. This low
voltage commonly occurs when connecting to
marina power sources that are derived from a
208 volt system rather than from a 240 volt
system. The IsoBoost Transformer can extend
the useful life of many electrical components
installed on the boat.
2. Monitors the incoming voltage and alarms to
warn you that the shore voltage has dropped to
a level outside the boosting range. It will
automatically shut down under conditions of
extreme low voltage.
3. The remote indicator panel (installed at the main
distribution panel in the cabin) allows you to
monitor the operating status of your IsoBoost
Tranformer without having to go physically to
the engine room to look at it. Refer to IsoBoost
manual in owner's manual packet for detailed
instructions.
4. Boat system protection: if the boat's voltage
drops below 192 VAC for more than four
seconds, the IsoBoost output is turned off.
Power will not be supplied again until shore
voltage has increased by at least 20 VAC. If the
boat’s voltage exceeds 260 VAC for five
seconds, the IsoBoost output is turned off. Refer
to IsoBoost manual in the owner’s manual
packet for detailed instructions.
If the IsoBoost Transformer turns off for a prolonged
period of time, turn on the generator to supply AC
power. Follow generator operating instructions (See
Section 3 - Using Your Boat, page 3.7).
C. GLENDINNING CABLEMASTER
The 450 EB is equipped with a 50am 240V/60
cycle shore power cord for hookup to dockside
power. The cablemaster system provides
remote control access to automatically
advance/retrieve the power cords. The power
cable is accessed from inside the transom
storage box, starboard side.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.11
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
fr
CABLEMASTER
(F16. 6.12.1)
(A) SHORE POWER CORD
REMOTE SWITCH
© DOCKSIDE TV/TELEPHONE
HOOK UP
D. MAIN SHORE POWER BREAKER Box
The 450 EB is equipped with a 240VAC main
shore power breaker box located aft of the
starboard engine in the bilge.
The breaker(s) must be ON to operate the shore
AC power system.
MAIN SHORE POWER BREAKER BOX
(F16. 6.12.2)
\. J
f =
E. SHORE POWER HOOKUP
The 240/120 volt AC main distribution panel
distributes the required voltage for all the boat's AC
equipment and accessories. It is very important to
know and understand where the power originates
and how the power is distributed to the different
voltage equipment and accessories.
To access the shore power cable:
1. Make sure the shore f Y
power breaker and all
branch breakers on the
main distribution panel
are OFF. Slide the
source selector over to
expose the SHORE
POWER breaker. ` 7
СЕМЕВАТОВ SHORE
Under no circumstances override the source
select system.
2. Advance shore power rf
cord to dockside
power box. Ensure
dockside breaker is
OFF, then plug the
shore power cord into
the shore power outlet
box on the dock and
turn dockside circuit ® /
breaker ON.
The use of extension shore power cords is not
recommended. Excessive power cord extensions
can cause a voltage drop and may prevent some
electronic devices from operating correctly.
6.12
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Shore power cord should be secured or routed to
avoid laying or falling into water and to avoid stress
on shore power plug and inlet.
It is imperative that the shore power outlet is dry
before plugging into the dock power inlet.
Shore power cord should be secured or routed to
avoid laying or falling into water and to avoid stress
on shore power plug and inlet.
3. Check the POWER
lights on the main
distribution panel. The
POWER lights should
be on. If not have the
dockmaster check the
dockside power. | |
POWER POWER
GENERATOR SHORE
3. Turn the SHORE POWER breaker ON.
4. Individual breakers and switches can now be
energized.
TO USE THE GENERATOR:
1. Start the generator by following the generator
start-up procedures in Section 3 - Using Your
Boat, page 3.8 or in your generator owner's
manual.
2. Make sure the shore SHORE POWER and all
branch breakers on the main distribution panel
are OFF.
3. Slide the source f )
selector to expose the
GENERATOR breaker
and turn the breaker
ON.
GENERATOR SHORE
N. J
F. MAINTENANCE FOR SHORE POWER
CABLE SET & SHORE POWER INLETS
Disconnect the power cable from power source before
performing maintenance.
The metallic parts of your cable set and inlet are
made to resist corrosion. In salt water environment,
life of the product can be increased by periodically
wiping the exposed parts with fresh water, drying
and spraying with a moisture repellent.
A soiled cable can be cleaned with grease-cutting
household detergent. A periodic application of vinyl
protector will help both ends and cable maintain their
original appearance.
In case of salt water spray or immersion: Rinse
plug end and/or connector end thoroughly in fresh
water, shake or blow out excess water and allow to
dry. Spray with a moisture repellent before reuse.
14. GENERATOR
Sea Ray® strongly urges you to fully comply with the
manual provided by the generator manufacturer. The
generator is warranted separately by the
generator manufacturer, NOT Sea Ray®. Follow
the recommended maintenance and warranty
schedule in your Generator Operators Manual
included in the Owner's Manual Packet. Generator
abuse or improper maintenance may adversely affect
claims made under generator manufacturer separate
warranty.
The generator is located in the bilge aft of the
starboard fuel tank. Generator gauges are located
under the bridge steps and on the generator.
A. GENERATOR OPERATION
The procedures for starting, stopping and switching
between generator and shore power are explained
in Section 3 - Using Your Boat, pages 3.7 thru 3.9.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.13
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
=
Do not run the generator in an enclosed area,
such as a closed boathouse, as there is a
possibility of build-up and inhaling of carbon
monoxide.
1
(GENERATOR
(FIG. 6.14.1) FWD
(A GENERATOR © COOLANT RECOVERY
TRANSOM BOTTLE
(© GENERATOR STRAINER (D GENERATOR MUFFLER
(O) GENERATOR SEACOCK (© GENERATOR SIPHON BREAK
15. BATTERY CHARGERS
Never block air circulation through the unit. Never
store any gear on top of the units.
NOTICE
Leave the converter running at all times to
maintain the 12 volt system voltage.
N. J
The main battery and generator batterycharging unit
is located on the forward component board in the
engine room. The bow thruster battery charger is
located on the port transom, aft of the port engine.
These units are fully automatic and designed
specifically for the marine environment. The high
frequency characteristic has allowed these
chargers to achieve a huge size and weight
reduction over their previously used equipment.
~
| MAIN ENGINE BATTERY CHARGER
(F16. 6.14.2)
(A FORWARD COMPONENT
BOARD
MAIN ENGINE &
GENERATOR BATTERY
CHARGER
© MAIN ENGINE BATTERY
BOX
Bow THRUSTER BATTERY CHARGER
(F1G. 6.14.3)
(A BOW THRUSTER
CHARGER
PORT TRANSOM
„
6.14
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Commonly called high frequency or smart
chargers, these units bring a new sophistication
to the battery charger field. These units feature a
built-in amperage indicator and a dual color
power-on LED. When the charger is on the LED
will be RED, indicating charger is in fast charge
mode. After the absorption cycle is complete
(approx. 3 hours) the LED will change to GREEN,
indicating the charger is in float mode. To verify
that the charger is functioning properly, turn on
lights or other load. The ammeter should register
Float Charge - this stage is designed to hold
the battery at a safe, low voltage (typically 26.5V)
providing up to the chargers full rated amperage
to accommodate DC load requirements. The
charge will remain in this mode until the AC
power is cycled off and then on again.
REFER TO OWNERS MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
and increase.
A. CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS
Bulk Charge - this is initiated at power up and
provides the chargers full-rated current to the
battery bank until a predetermined voltage level
of 14.2V to 14.4V is achieved and/or a certain
time has passed.
Absorption Charge - this stage immediately
follows the bulk charge mode. It maintains the
battery voltage at the bulk charge voltage level,
but gradually decreases the current as the
battery accepts the charge until it reaches a
predetermined current level.
Float Charge - this stage is designed to hold
the battery at a safe, low voltage (typically 13.3V)
providing up to the chargers full rated amperage
to accommodate DC load requirements. The
charge will remain in this mode until the AC
power is cycled off and then on again.
B. CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS OF THE
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
BOW THRUSTER BATTERY CHARGER.
Bulk Charge - this is initiated at power up and
provides the chargers full-rated current to the
battery bank until a predetermined voltage level
of 28.5V to 28.8V is achieved and/or a certain
time has passed.
Absorption Charge - this stage immediately
follows the bulk charge mode. It maintains the
battery voltage at the bulk charge voltage level,
but gradually decreases the current as the
battery accepts the charge until it reaches a
predetermined current level.
16. HALOGEN LIGHTING
Your 450 EB uses 12 volt
Halogen lights throughout as
the primary lighting system.
The system is powered by the
lighting breakers on the DC
distribution panel located in the
salon and activated by lighting
switches throughout the boat
(See Section 2 - General Boat
arrangement, Figures 2.25.1
thru 2.27.1). \ J
HALOGEN BULB |
(F16. 6.15.1)
The filament bulbs used in all halogen-cycle lamps
generate intense heat. To avoid the possibility of
fire, do not use lamp at close range to materials
that are combustible or affected by heat or drying.
Halogen-cycle bulbs are pressurized and could
shatter if scratched or damaged. Glass halogen-
cycle bulbs should be protected against contact
with liquids when operating.
A. CHANGING A BLOWN BuLB
Use appropriate protection, such as a clean cloth
or gloves when handling or disposing of all Halogen-
cycle bulbs. Wear eye protection. Turn power off
when installing or before removing lamp. Allow lamp
to cool before removal.
Remove grease or fingerprints from new Halogen
bulbs with a grease-free solvent before use.
6.15
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Grab light fixture housingand f( |
pull gently from ceiling or wall.
Take care when pulling the
housing as it is spring loaded
in the socket and the clips will
snap quickly downward when
released from the ceiling or
wall.
Grab the fixture containing the f )
bulb and twist counter
clockwise.
Pull the fixture out of the f )
housing and replace the bulb
with a bulb of equal wattage.
NOTE: The glass face plate
in the housing is very fragile. =
Be careful that it remains in —
place and does not fall out, as
it will break easily.
To replace the housing, f )
reverse the previous
directions. Grab the clips and
hold them upwards until the
housing is placed into its
receptacle in the wall or
17. GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER
RECEPTACLE (GFI)
Ground fault interrupter receptacles are
located in the galley inside the lower cabinet
under the sink, master head upper storage
cabinet above the sink, guest head upper
cabinet above the sink, and in the cockpit
inside the port storage locker. The GFI
receptacles are out of sight and wired in-line
with the exposed Vmar receptacles throughout
the yacht. This allows your yacht to have an
elegant exposed receptacle while still providing
protection from shock hazards. Please read
and understand the CAUTION block above.
Persons with heart problems or other conditions
which make them susceptible to electric shock may
still be injured by ground faults on circuits protected
by the GFl receptacle. No safety devices yet designed
will protect against all hazards or carelessly handled
or misused electrical equipment or wiring.
(GH OUTLET x
(Fıc. 6.16.1)
; py
ceiling. Push gently to seatthe | J
light housing securely.
B. AC Low VOLTAGE LIGHTING
Some overhead lighting in the salon is powered by
the generator or the shore power system.
Transformers located behind the salon
entertainment center reduce the voltage from
120VAC to 12VAC supplying the lighting with a stable,
constant power source.
The GFI receptacle is designed to protect
people from the line-to-ground shock hazards
which could occur from defective power tools
or appliances operating from this device, or
from down-line outlets protected by it. It does
not prevent line-to-ground electric shock, but
does limit the time of exposure to a period
considered safe for normally healthy persons.
It does not protect persons against line-to-line
or line-to-neutral faults.
The GFI receptacle does not protect against
short circuits or overloads. This is the function
of the circuit breaker.
6.16
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
A. INTERNATIONAL RECEPTACLE
All readily accessible 220V outlets are protected by
a Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) located
in an out-of-sight location such as under a cabinet
and includes a test switch to verify proper operation.
lts function is similar, but not identical to the 120V
СА.
'RCCB OUTLET
(Fra. 6.17.1) Pramere Premere
cos IAN= 10mA
18. ELECTROLYTIC CORROSION AND
ZINC ANODES
Electrolysis corrosion of metals on power boats
can result in serious deterioration. The boat owner
must be aware of the possibilities of galvanic action
(the deterioration of metals due to dissimilar
characteristics when placed in salt water), and/or
electrolysis. It is the owner’s responsibility to check
for and replace damaged parts due to galvanic
deterioration. Refer to your Sea Ray® dealer to
investigate the source of stray corrosive currents.
Zinc plates are installed on the transom and trim
tabs to protect underwater hardware. Zinc, being
much less “noble” than copper based alloys and
aluminum used in underwater fittings, will
deteriorate first and protect the more noble parts.
Zinc anodes generally require replacement
about once a year. (In salt water areas, replace
every six (6) months). The need to replace anodes
more frequently may indicate a stray current
problem within the boat or at the slip or mooring. If
zinc anodes do not need replacing after one year,
they may not be providing proper protection. Loose
anodes or low-grade zinc may be the problem.
| ZINC ANODES ON TRANSOM AND TRIM TABS
(F1G6. 6.17.2)
(A ZINC ANODE ON TRIM TABS
TRIM TABS
© ZINC ANODE
© TRANSOM ZINC ANODE
= J
be connected through the water to grounded metals
ashore. The zincs will be consumed at a faster rate
unless the marina maintains a protective system
to prevent this. In this case, hanging a zinc in the
water bonded to the metal outlet box on the dock
will reduce zinc loss on the boat. DO NOT connect
this zinc to the boat's ground system.
Replace zinc anodes if they are corroded 50% or more.
It is extremely important that all electrically
operated DC equipment and accessories be
wired so that the ground polarity of each device
is the same as that of the battery. Sea Ray® boats
have a negative ground system, which is the
recommended practice throughout the marine
industry. All metal items (fuel tanks, underwater
gear, etc.) in the boat are connected to the zinc
anode by the green bonding wire.
Electrolytic corrosion can also be caused by “stray
currents” due to a fault in an electrical item, even
though correctly grounded.
Г NOTICE -
DO NOT PAINT BETWEEN THE ZINC AND THE
METAL IT CONTACTS, AND DO NOT PAINT OVER
(THE ZINC.
When an AC shore power system is connected to A
the boat, the underwater metal fittings will, in effect,
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 6.17
SECTION 6 * ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL
SCHEMATICS & WIRING
HARNESSES
This owner's manual contains electrical
schematics and wiring harness illustrations for
your boat (See pages 6.19 thru 6.42). These
electrical schematics were generated by electrical
CAD designers at the engineering division for
technical reference and service technicians. Sea
Ray® does not recommend that you attempt to
work on the boat's electrical system yourself.
Instead we recommend that you take your boat
to your authorized Sea Ray” dealer for service.
Sea Ray” reserves the right to change or update
the electrical system on any model at any time
without notice to the consumer and is NOT
obligated to make any updates to units built prior
to changes.
6.18
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES
1
\.
Positive BATTERY CABLE ROUTING
09-270 (1 ое 2)
DRAWING NO.
(FIG. 6.19.1)
N°
(A) PORT BATTERY SWITCH
(B STARBOARD BATTERY SWITCH
(© EMERGENCY START SOLENOID
(D MAIN DC GROUND BUSS
(© TO STARBOARD BATTERY
(®) STARBOARD ENGINE STARTER
(G) TO PORT BATTERY
(H PORT ENGINE STARTER
NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE ROUTING
DRAWING NO. 09-270 (2 oF 2)
(Fra. 6.19.2)
FWD
~~
(A) TO PORT BATTERY
(B TO STARBOARD BATTERY
(© EMERGENCY START SOLENOID
(D) MAIN DC GROUND BUSS
© STARBOARD ENGINE TO ENGINE MAIN
DC GROUND BUSS (SECURE TO
GROUND STUD ON STARTER)
(E) ENGINE TO ENGINE GROUND
(SECURE TO BLOCK)
@ ENGINE TO ENGINE GROUND
(SECURE TO BLOCK)
® PORT ENGINE TO ENGINE MAIN DC
GROUND BUSS (SECURE TO
GROUND STUD ON STARTER)
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
0c 9
HR
Ol
©
[T1
x
©
=
D
о
о
0
=.
o
O
D
~~
O1
—
O1
[T1
x
©
=
D
wn
о
0
=.
o
O
©
(QANNLINO)) SASSANAVH ONRIAA 2 SOLLVINAHOS TVORILOATY DA ®№ IV 61
—
= Е ©
к О зо
as MO
DZ
ses
— 5 Z
z52
Oo wm
>
00
O
Go
—
—
©
N
Ne’
227
= =
ИЕ О зо
Dor
>> E
55%
o
©”
00
O
Go
©
©
=
N
Ne’
HAN
O1
©
[T1
x
©
=
D
о
о
0
=.
o
O
D
~~
O1
—
O1
[T1
x
©
=
D
wn
о
0
=.
o
O
©
Lo‘ 9
(QANNLINO)) SASSANAVH ONRIAA 2 SOLLVINAHOS TVORILOATY DA Y IV 61
= D ©
T ©
mn
= O 7
D : = +
ON =
Az Q
25 е
. Z, >
—
a ©
© =
o >
oo ~
— Z
jm
N
N
OM
OD
mm!
Su
ma
>>
O
IT]
ne
om Es
mw [T1
UU с
ST US
on —
г =
Ш Г
=
"=
383
==
m=
oo
0
Mm
с
=
13
>
o
Г
ГП
wn
vx
©
0
A
5
D o<
OO
Zr
Sc
=
om
9
—
m
—
IT]
U
IT
o
=z
ГП
A DES
5 ОЕ
ON = 5
NO
=. я
Do
о. O
— >
© o
e de =
С DE Z
- ne >
a me = а
I um >
= „7 n >
—
= am < = 7
[T1 [LH m >
5 m> y Si
o — OU =z —
= mn ma mum A
D 3 > om” N
— TL
Г > Sm oY
= — A n=
= o (an —
= = IM
a DO 1
Г N o
= ©
= =
n=
m>
on
mM
om
DD
Zr
T2
"3
=
>
in
—
[T1
=
C T
Sn ©
20 E S05 ©
o m= TL > = @
+45 OO DO o =
= mM >< = —
A 32 3
+
yo LM 2 OZ
mc =50 m Г
om + o> [T1
mo = sm
= 29 ox
> <> mo
o #5 =
Г >> T
ma +
ГП o
DD O
o <
o
=
310V 143034 NOVS ОМУ 0915
ANOHd NOIVS
3 19Y1d399H 390149
0)
—
J
OU
>
UT
—
U)
>
Г
©
=
—U
[T1
o
[T1
CU
+
>
o
—
[T1
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
FORWARD STATEROOM HARNESS
DRAWING NO. 09-815
(Fra. 6.22.1)
MASTER STATEROOM HEAD HARNESS
DRAWING NO. 09-81 7
(Fra. 6.22.2)
6.22
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
HAN
O1
©
[T1
x
©
=
D
о
о
0
=.
o
O
D
~~
O1
—
O1
[T1
x
©
=
D
wn
о
0
=.
o
O
©
Ec 9
(GHNNIINOJ) SASSANAVH DNIMIAA № SOLLVIWAHOS TVORILOATH DA Y IV 61
NS я
© 257
= =
00006 ==
©
PUSO NV Л £a
г сост —
—— > 53 I >
п пт | 7
о Ч От 0 | 7 2
гс пс г D
092035 | lb
1 т A | @
+ A (
J
7 /
/ |
N
\
\
©
E
>
He
Do
DEZ
Se
co =
SE
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
(GALLEY HARNESS BRIDGE HARNESS
DRAWING NO. 09-827 DRAWING NO. 09-839
(Fig. 6.24.1) (FIG. 6.24.2)
a | =
— / ;
* / _
| |
|
/
—
|
———
E
H
A MICROWAVE @ GALLEY VENT
(® STOVE LIGHT (BD) FORWARD VALANCE LIGHT
(© COFFEE MAKER RECEPTACLE (D GALLEY LIGHTS
(D AFT GALLEY RECEPTACLE (@ REFRIGERATOR FREEZER
E) TO MDP (K) GALLEY SWITCH
® GALLEY GFI
6.24 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
fr N
PORT LOAD
PORT
PORT LINE ENGINE
MAIN DC
BREAKER PANEL —< WINDLESS FEED
REF DWG 09-604
STBD LOAD
4,0 BLK
STBD LINE 4/0 RED
TH
>) 4/0 RED STARTER
PORT BATTERY >
SOLENOID I
О 4/0 RED
И
4/0 RED (< 9 y
HA
NN LA
BATTERY SOLENOIDS —
+ JSE HOLDER | STBD
o = MAIN DC
1 75 = NEG BUS
Les] La
& 75 ==
Г | Pa
& 75 —
SPARE [O] 75 lO] 4/0 BLK—
SPARE |O| 75 lO]
STARTER
(6),
STBD BATTERY
SOLENOID ~
] ( G 4/0 RED
/
4/0 RED NT
2/0 BLK —
STARTER
MAIN DC
NEG BUS
GENERATOR
SOLENOID
PLUG 9l CAP 89 Рос 89 PLUG 92
1 |<<+ 543-16 WHT/BLU 2/0 RED a 543-16 WHT/BLU —<| 1 14 543-16 WHT/BLU >|]
2 | <+544-I6 WHT/RED 5/1 1 N 544-16 WHT/RED—+< | 2 |< 544-16 WHT/RED-> | 2
3 |< 545-16 RED 545-16 RED —<| 3 |< 545-16 RED +> |3
4 |<! 546-18 RED/VIO 546-16 RED/VIO +< | 4 |< 546-16 RED/VIO +> | 4 DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL
5 |< 547-168 WHT/BLU 547-16 WHT/BLU —<| 5 |< 547-16 WHT/BLU>>|5 REF DWG 09-603
- 548-168 WHT/RED 548-16 WHT/RED — 548-16 WHT/RED->|8
REF DWG 09-604 6 |< W \ NE N >
7|< 549-16 RED ——h H—————— | 549-16 RED —<| 7 |< 549-16 RED+>|7
g |<+ 550-18 RED/VIO 550-16 RED/VIO—| 8 |< 550-16 RED/VIO->|B
9 | <+ 55116 WHT/BLU 551-16 WHT/BLU —< | 9 | < 551-16 WHT/BLU+7| 9
10 | <+552-16 WHT/RED 552-16 WHT/RED —+< | 10 |< 552-16 WHT/RED +> |10
11 |<+553-16 RED 553-16 RED—A| 11 |< 553-16 RED +> |
12 |< 554-16 RED/VIO 554-16 RED/VIO —< | 12 |< 554-16 RED/VIO +> |12
13 |<+ 555-16 BLK 555-16 BLK—<| 13 555-16 BLK-> |13
14 | Ct UNUSED | UNUSED —<| 14 | €1-UNUSED UNUSED +> [14
15 | <+ UNUSED UNUSED —<<| 15 | <+ UNUSED UNUSED >| 15
STBD
PORT BATTERY GENERATOR BATTERY
BATTERY BATTERY CHARGER —
—] 10/3 FROM MDP
— REF DWG 09-631
D+ - © D+ - G1 D+ OT | |
2/0 BLK
Иво | 107-8 RED
109-8 BLK
Leo | 108-8 RED
4/0 BLK 4/0 BLK 80 115-8 RED
MAIN DC
MAIN DC NEGATIVE BUSS NEG BUS
9 0.0 0 0 0 O
© © 0 0 Aa O 0 0 AO © (1)
Le J
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.25
9c 9
HR
Ol
©
[T1
x
©
=
D
о
о
0
=.
o
O
D
~~
O1
—
O1
[T1
x
©
=
D
wn
о
0
=.
o
O
©
~~
Es
—
o
O
N
ÓN
—
—
PLUG 6
< 16 LT BLU — | |
OIL PRESSURE ( — [6 TAN — lo
| 16 GRY —> |3 PORT ENGINE
WATER TEMP CE 14 VIO — 4 REF "DIC 09-993
PORT — 14 YEL/RED — | 5
TACHOMETER EE 14 BLACK — le
FUEL ES
— 16 BLU COMPASS PORT
VOLT CE 16 ELK LIGHT
PORT IGNITION
PORT START LOAD JO SHIFT
PORT START LINE NEUTRAL
STBD START LINE SAFETY
STBD START LOAD SWITCHES
STBD IGNITION
INSTRUMENT PANELS PLUG 7 STBD
REFERENCE 14-800 CE] 16 LT BLU {21
OIL PRESSURE | 16 TAN —> |, TED ENGINE
FF 16 GRY 2 |3 HARNESS
WATER TEMP = 14 VIO —7 |4 REF DIG 09-893
STBD — 14 YEL/RED —> | 5
TACHOMETER CEH 14 BLACK — 6
FUEL CH |
VOLT CE
= Л = 5
= © = av
— — = Y — Го о
2252 Res
35 3525
| ||
CAP 31 Y Y V\PLue 32
| 2 3 4 | 2 3 4
PLUS 31 [AAN Y Y Y Y CAP 32
| |
PORT NIE
EMERGENCY Y
START PLUG 1
Eu 200U- 16 PNK |
STBD 1GNITION 202U- 16 PNK/BLK 5
207U- 14 RED/VIO 3
310U-14 BRN 4
302U- 14 BRN = STBD EXTENSION HARNESS
525U- 14 ORANGE 5 REF DWG 09-804
527U-16 BLK 7
218LNU- 14 RED/V10 —>| 9
225LNU-14 RED/VIO —>!g
GROUNDING STUD
14 BLACK O | CAP 2
E
FROM ELECTRONICS - 2
FROM ELECT N= 309-14 BRN/RED <
BILGE PUMPS | 301-14 BRN/RED ~<|3 sIBD КЕ ION HARNESS
406U- 16 WHT ~|4 REF DWG 09-804
AFT | 408U- 16 RED <5
407U- 16 BLK 6
BLOWERS | | <
PANEL GROUND CAP 3
L£ 1 115-14 BLK = |
—B à G GPS = 6000-14 BLU/WHT <>
— MULTI FUNCTION = 6001-14 BLU/WHT =| 3
BREAKER PANEL _ AUTOPILOT — 6008-14 BLU +<|4
REF DWG 14-804 ENGINE SYNCH 229-16 GRY/WHT № 5 BRIDGE HABNESS
A L 230-16 GRY/RED 6
STEREO “25 A 231-16 GRY <
AP 8 7
PLUG 8 C BRIDGE | ]
AN LICHTS à 234-16 GRY <|8
pe 14 RED/VIO _
ACCESSORY [xx |] | | PONER 580-16 RED/VIO <|9
14 RED/VIO > 582-16 RED/VIO ———<l1o
LIGHTS
I
LIGHTING 5 *— 14 RED VIO 3 a“ 11
A — RED/VIO 4131 ACCESSORY ~~ 595-14 RED/VIO ——<l12
HORN “5 >— 5|>+ | В
14 RED/VIO 6 | PLUG 5
ENGINE (NN 8 Is
SYNCH | 7 |
— 231-14 GRY >
HORN ге” | 214-14 RED/VIO q
= 528U- 16 RED/VIO 4
WINDLASS = | 213U- 14 ORN/BLK 5
A MAIN 529U-16 WHT/BLU 6 STBO EXTENSION HARNESS
TRIM TABS PU 8 = 530U-16 WHT/BLU , REF DNG 09-804
SPOTL 1GHT “в [4 RED/VIO | CONTROL a 528U- 16 RED/VIO 9
14 RED/VIO > Las | 2—| 5320-16 BLU 10
NAVIGATION <0 — 14 RED/VIO 3|<+ 533U- 16 GRN il
4 ST | INVERTOR | vor |?
I NVERTOR |
FN = +!
RECEPTACLE [* 15 | 14 RED/VIO 5 "1B BLK 16 BLU 16 GRAY
14 RED/VIO 6 16 GANT
BRIDGE ~~ | le De CONSOLE
FREEZER | 15 W DIMMER
| = 16 ORN
CONTROL STATION MAIN RUNNING
10 RED/VIO NAVIGATION SWITCH PANEL
TO ACR SPOTLIGHT
SPOTLIGHT ODULÉ
14 BLK
14 RED/VIO
12 VOLT D.C.
RECEPTACLE
NOTE:
GROUNDS FOR LIGHTED SWITCHES ARE
NOT SHOWN
BUT SUPPLIED BY VENDOR
CONTROL STATION
513U-1
5140-1
5150-1
516
O RED
0 GRN
0 YEL
U-10 BLU
14 RED/VIO
>|
PLUG 27
(7 10 7) 109-60 "ON DNIMVIA
ILVWAHIS ONAN DO
(QANNILINO)) SASSANAVH ONIMIAA 2 SOLLVINAHOS TVORILOATY DA IV “61
(1/79 19)
A a
O1
©
[T1
Xx
©
=
MD
N
N
00
>.
Q
oO
D
— 101-8 RED/VIO О REF DWG 09-601
O1
> AMMETER CABIN MAIN
IN (-) TN
x e O RED O Ligne] 5 10 BLU 5
©
D ON T0 —
о TERM. STRIP CABIN STEREO
U TN REF DWG 09-603
© 10 RED STEREO 55 Ÿ 14 RED 5017 16 BRN-335 |
—
FRESH WATER 15 > 14 YEL-409 >
PUMP #1 — 16 RED-547 5 CAP IE
FRESH WATER 15 6 WHT-550 REF DWG 09-603
rea GUEST HEAD SYSTEM > 14 RED/VIO-590 5
TEST C.0. 1
PORT
STED MONITOR ! | ВЕР/УТО
10 RED AN ] | 14 RED/VIO CO.
р a | SOFA CONTROLLER [* XX 14 RED/VIO MONITOR
(+ TN
12 VDC RECEPTACLE |5 10 RED
12 VDC
VOLTMETER 14 VEL 10 RED-5012 —— RECEPTACLE
POWER VENTS > YEL
14 YEL
REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER >
ACCESSORY] <>
MASTER HEAD SYSTEM [<7 I
16 RED-555 ——<|
18 BLK 16 BLK-556 —<| 5
16 WHT-557 —<| 3
16 GRN-558 —< 4
14 YEL-417 —<| 5
14 YEL-414 — CAP 13
— SE REF DWG 09-603
DISCHARGE PUMP “5 >— 14 RED/VIO — 18 BRN-3I7 —< 7 SHEET 2
16 RED 10 RED-5055 —<| g
Js
WATER LEVEL
FULL 14 ORN-541 |
a 16 GRN-542 >
| PLUG 14
1/2 6 YEL-543 3 REF DWG 09-603
1/4 16 BLU-544 4 SHEET 2
14 RED/VIO-578 6
14 ORN-501 7
14 BRN/WHT-517 а
16 RED 14 BRN/WHT-519 9
FULL 16 СРМ 16 GRN-505 10
1/2 16 WHT 16 WHT-506 |
EMPTY 16 YEL 16 YEL-507 12
| POWER 16 BLK 16 BLK-508 13
WASTE LEVEL 16 BRN-317 14
16 BLK/YEL-503 15
DISCHARGE y
7 16 BLK-40M ———<||
BLOWERS > 16 WHT400M —— <> CAP 12
5 16 RED-40M —< a E
UNUSED ——<la 09-601
UNUSED ——<|5
UNUSED ——<6
ONAN GENERATOR 95416 BLK << | |
REMOTE IGNITION SYSTEM 953-16 YEL/RED << | 2
ALL JUMPERS 952-16 BLK/GRY +< | 3
14 ANG 951-16 WHT/RED | 4 SEN Bon
| 957-16 ON << | 5 HARNESS
START/STOP 956-16 RED/WHT +< | 6 REF 09-617
329-16 WHT/RED + | 7
UNUSED -< 8
UNUSED + | 9
| 14 BED/VIO-218BLN. >|,
14 RED/VIO-225LN — >|» PLUG 16
PORT IGNITION Ps BILGE
14 RED/VIO-2IBLNA ~~ ————=>| 3 HARNESS
REF DIG 09-60!
14 RED/VIO-225LNA —— > 14
STBD IGNITION ~~ | —
14 BLK 16 RED
BATTERY SWITCH
5 SOLENOID PORT —
7 543-16 WHT/BLU +>| |
3 544-16 WHT/RED +—> | 5
8
545-16 RED —— | a
546-16 RED/VIO +> | 4
7 4 5 6 STBD
547-16 WHT/BLU +>| 5 CAP 92
REF DWG
> 548-16 WHT/RED +>| 6 09-601
© p 217 549-16 RED >| —
550-16 RED/VIO -
7 4 5) ,6 GENERATOR RE
55H6 WHT/BLU 45 | 9
Ÿ 552-16 WHT/RED +>| 10
CI 8
— г #8 553-16 ВЕО +>| |}
CABIN BC 554-16 RED/VIO +>| |>
NEG, BUS 55516 BLK >| | 4
UNUSED += | 14
UNUSED +>| [5
©
N
N
(Z 40 1) £09-60 "ON ONIMVIA
ILLVWAHIS ONIM JO NIQVI
(QANNILINO)) SASSANAVH ONIMIAA 2 SOLLVINAHOS TVORILOATY DA № IV “61
O fr
N
Co > O
er z >
mn
О = Е
O5 2
Do w
7 A
jam
Oo =
© Е
о
>
vu UN
‚^^ Q
N =
©
FWD SALON LIGHT SWITCH =
16 BLU/WHT-652 NZ
10 BLU-6074 16 BLU/WHT-653 SALON LICHTS O
10 BLU-654 — STBD STATEROOM LIGHTS
M.D.P. TL FWD STATEROOM LIGHTS
TERMINAL T0
СТР GUEST STATEROOM LIGHTS
о о 10 BLU-8050 —— « GALLEY LIGHTS
FWD LIGHTING —— 634-10 BLUE -
N ! o ens — AFT STATEROOM LIGHTS
—
2 7510 BLU-605
AFT LIGHTING —— 6535-10 BLUE С 3 10 BLU-673
— BILGE LIGHTS
BILGE /COCKPIT Вы 10 BLU-6070 Г
LIGHTING ——636-10 BLUE 10 BLU-6081
> | COCKPIT — BLUE — — — COCKPIT LICHTS
— 6 ——— — — 10 BLU-6082 LICHTS
LL
о © L MODULE
BLACK WHITE
COCKPIT LIGHTS SWITCHES
STBD CABIN HARNESS Р
PLUG 15 CAP 32 LUG 32 GUEST HEAD
| 317 —— 16 BRN 1 605 — 14 ВЦ LIGHTS
> 47 — 14 YEL 2|<7— 417 — 14 vEL
_ 0 | — | |
ner z 555 6 BED 3 <7— 555 — 16 RD or FULL
SHEET I 4 552 — |6 WHT 4|<T—556 — sax: | SUMP POWER 1/2 DO NOT
5 558 —— 16 GRN | 5|<— 557 — e wr FLUSH
| — |
6 6 |<7—558 — 16 oan
556 ISBLK —— — 7 <— 317 — 16 BRN HEAD
_ | — VENT | — |] 7.5A
419-14 BLK — |g | + +9 14 BLK Tone
_ ___ — 606 — 14 BLK
L LL 7606-14 BLK <| о |< X x x 4106 YEL
MDP
12 VDC— 5012? —— 10 RED 12 VDC
RECEPTACLE _ 5013 10 BLK RECEPTACLE
- 601-14 BLU
ROUTE TO | 7.5A |
GALLEY POWER VENT ) |
| J |
| |
| |
| |
| GALLEY |
| VENT 1 ,
| PART OF GALLEY HARNESS = |
PORT CABIN HARNESS a 3
PLUG 13
PLUG 28
CAP BO MASTER STATEROOM HEAD
| 547 — 14 RED | |< 7—8600 — 14 вц) TER
2 552 — 148K | 2 |< 409 — 14 YEL a]
3 550 _ 14 WHT | < 3 < 547 — 16 RED | | HEAD VENT
Г вое Lx FULL
REF 4 551 — 14 GRN 4|\<}— 552 — 16 BLK TRC SUMP POWER i ыы NOT a
SHEET | — 6 YEL
5 409 — 5|<1— 550 — |g wut FLUSH
14 YEL hm — |
6 45 14 YEL 6 16 GRN An
7 2335 — 14 BRN 7 <-— 325 — 16 BRN — VENT
5055 —— 10 RED q 404BK — < |в |< 41 — {4 BLK
B MDP = 50114 BLK < <— — LIGHTS HEAD LIGHT SW
MOP =
—
REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER
—
BILGE HARNESS
CAE 521-16 BLK |
54
‚|2 57 16 ORN TAN DC |
> |258 — 6 on GND BUSS T
3 > 59 — eve VACULM
4 >+—520 — 16 BLU J SWITCH
s > — 201 14 RED/VIO | i IO FRESH
es >| 93 — 14 RED/VIO 504 14 BLK > WATER
= | TANK
Е 7 > 523 14 ORN M F GUEST HEAD
_ - VACUUM
SHEET | 8 > 513 14 BRN/WHT 5 (о) 14 BLK 1 12 12 GENERATOR |
* ео |255 14 BRN/WHT 14 BLK = MAIN DC VACUUM
>— 522 — — MAIN DC FRESH GND BUSS SWITCH
10 16 GRN WATER PUMP | _
> — 523 —— 1 ] FRESH GND BUSS |
11 16 WHT | <2 WATER PUMP 2 | ©)
12 > — 524 — eva + q y 502 14 BLK >
L _ 3 HOLDING = —
13 >—+— 525 6 BLK ; 5 mue | TOS м = MASTER HEAD
14 >—+ 317 — BBRAN ———— иг | | VACUUM
м - — GENERATOR
15)>1— 534 —— 16 BLK/YEL MOE
EMPTY
SUMP PUMP 7 ~
REF DWG 09-601 30 | в; | RED
| 14 BRN 7 TD
> 14 BLK/YEL BEN — B7A a
53314 вск — «| з 14 BLK SEACOCK SIV SHOWN
MAN DCL < oO) BLK W/SEACOCK IN
MF 86 85 | CLOSED POSITION
13 13 $ >
DUE TO SIMILARITIES BETWEEN PANELS, 1 ;
SPECIFIC WIRE NUMBERS WILL NOT MATCH ‘ >
PANEL SCHEMATIC. N J 2
DISCHARGE PUMP
A
O1
©
[T1
><
©
=
D
0
0
с
=.
Oo
с
D
~~
O1
—
O1
[T1
><
©
=
D
0
0
с
=.
Oo
с
D \
Na
(GHNNIINO) SASSANAVH DNIMIAA № SOLLVIWAHOS TVORILOATY DA Y IV “61
HAN
O1
©
[T1
x
©
=
D
о
о
0
=.
o
O
D
~~
O1
—
O1
[T1
x
©
=
D
wn
о
0
=.
o
O
©
669
REF DWG 09-601
— en
CABIN MAIN
REF DWG 09-603
104-8 RED/VIO TERMINAL
ABEL 5/16 >1UD5
PORT LOAD DORT
50° МА]
[GNITION
BUS BAR
CABLEMASTER
ACCESSORY
LABEL
PORT LINE
BUS BAR
STEREO
BLOWER #1
SOLENOID
6
LABEL
WINDLASS FEED REF 09-614
LABEL
STBD LOAD
BUS BAR
IGNITION
ELECTRONICS
LABEL
STBD LINE
CABIN STEREO
BUS BAR
SYSTEMS MONITOR
FWD SUMP PUMP
Y
BILGE
AFT PUMP
BLOWER #2
PORT MAIN
BATTERY SOLENOID
7
ST
BATTERY SOLENOID
7
GENERATOR MAIN
BATTERY SOLENOID
_
5
MAIN DC BREAKER PANEL
REF DWG 14-850
218LN- 14 RED/VIO —
225LN- 14 RED/VIO —
5004-14 RED —
Ja oO 1
SUENO E >
< TT oT xr x > O
о > > XX № <> SN Z
— Zz > Z > 2 Zz 14d =F
>> ro D MM 5 omc >> Mm
<< OST ELSE Ns N
! Po] DO Na
© 009% @o co — MW — m — ©
© —0N QO —0O0 oo — O ny So = ©)
Oo wm Om mmo Om ngs ST MM
chp 17 [AAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
| 2 34 5 6 7 8 9101 121314 15
C
>
| =
С)
CO
REF DWG 09-601
BILGE HARNESS
AAAAAA
|
AAAA]
529-16 WHT/BLU —<
530-16 WHT/BLU —<
531-16 RED <
528- 16 RED/VIO ——t<
100-8 RED/V10 —IO) 5116
TERMINAL
STUDS
LABEL
REF DWG 09-601
CONTROL STATION
101-8 RED/VIO — ( ) 5/16
TERMINAL
STUDS
LABEL
ELECTRONICS
REF DWG 09-601
REF DWG 09-601
543- 16 WHT/BLU
544-16 WHT/RED
545-16 RED
|
546-16 RED/VIO
547-16 WHT/BLU
548-16 WHT/RED
549-16 RED
550-16 RED/VIO
551-16 WHT/BLU
552-16 WHT/RED
553-16 RED
554-16 RED/VIO
555-16 BLK
с)
ГААЛАЛАА) CAMARA? TAAAA]E
=
(D
1
co — © Ul EW NJ —
Hm = © го = © ©
(1679 O19)
509-60 ON DNLMVYG
OLIVNAHOS TANVe YHIVHAG D NIVIN
(QANNILINO)) SASSANAVH ONIMIAA 2 SOLLVINAHOS TVORILOATY DA № IV “61
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
f A
CABLEMASTER REMOTE SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-605
(Fra. 6.30.1) -- OUT
OFF POWER SWITCH
/ \ =
и SN 11
10" VENDOR SUPPLIED HARNESSES
SEE NOTES 3 & 4
REF 09-604 5004 RED | Ol = RED e | TZ OEA -
REF 09-962 5005 GND TOI - ZEW [Ot —=9Y\ REMOTE - YELLOW ——
6 | 7 REMOTE -GREEN —
e ET БМ
MWIH LOTT SHILA
me {OTS i SOE TP an
BLACK +O = > SWITCH PE
NOTES:
1) WITH NEW RELAY ASSEMBLY
A 12VDC REMOTE CONTROL IS UNUSED
SUITABLE FOR ALL VOLTAGES.
(12,24, ЗВУОС)
2) CIRCUIT BREAKER SPECS:
CM7-12VDC 20 AMP BREAKER 8-10 RUNNING AMPS RADIO o
CM7-24VDC 10 AMP BREAKER 5-6 RUNNING AMPS CONTROL
CM7-32VDC 10 AMP BREAKER 5-6 RUNNING AMPS RECIEVER
3) PLANT TO INSTALL 5 AMP INLINE FUSE [VOC
DIRECTLY TO CABLEMASTER RELAY.
4) FUSE LEAD ATTACHES DIRECTLY TO RELAY
AND MUST NOT EXCEED 7" IN LENGTH.
Nu
ANTENNA
6.30 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
1
SYSTEMS MONITOR SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-606
(F16. 6.31.1)
7
NE
TWO LINE
LCD DISPLAY
AUDIBLE ALARM
ALARM SELECT
SYSTEMS MONT TOR
(eine HEAT DETECTOR
330 RGB/U COAX
SYSTEMS MONITOR INDICATOR PANEL
BACK LIGHT
REF DWG
09-601
[6 RED/VIO
NE
PORT ENG DIAGNOSTIC (=)
PORT OIL PSI
PORT WATER TEMP
PORT TRANSMISSION TEMP
EMERGENCY BILGE PUMP
FWD EMERGENCY PUMP
AFT EMERGENCY PUMP
FWD BILGE PUMP
AFT BILGE PUMP
PORT EXHAUST TEMP
PORT FUEL FILTER COND
STBD ENG DIAGNOSTIC (+)
SIBD OIL PSI
STBD WATER TEMP
PORT CAT DIAGNOSTIC
STBD CAT DIAGNOSTIC
PORT SERVICE ENG SOON
FWD SUMP
AFT SUMP
STBD TRANSMISSION TEMP (-]
STBD EXHAUST TEMP
STBD FUEL FILTER COND
PORT IGN
AFT PUMP
STBD SERVICE ENG SOON
+ 12/24VDC
+ 12/24VDC
GEN OIL
STBD IGN
VV VV
GEN IGN
GROUND
Ÿ
GROUND
NE
SYSTEMS MONITOR
INTERFACE MODULE
16 RED/VIO
со со о оп OWN —
— ©
Го
© Oo N ON SW —
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY YY Y Y Y Y15
— 320 16 BLU
— 321 [6 BRN
— 322 16 WHT
— 306 [6 BRN
— 314 [6 BRN
— 311 16 BRN
— 303 16 BRN
324 16 BLU
325 16 BRN
— 326 16 WHT
— 319 16 VIO
— 378 16 RED/VIO
— 331 16 RED/VIO —
— 563 16 BLK/WHT
— 323 16 VIO
— 562 16 WHT/RED
— 327 16 BLK
— 329 16 BLK —
lo BLK
16 BLK
REF DWG
09-601
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.31
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
f A
PHONE CABLE SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-607
(Fıc. 6.32.1)
SHORE PHONE/TV
INLET
NOTE | — —
— RED 12 || BLACK
RO BLACK UNUSED TX TS UNUSED
No UNUSED 2 T UNUSED
R
© RED
| REF DWG
(> TV COAX 5016-R6 6 ——— REP Pi
SHORE PHONE /TV
INLET PHONE JACK INSERT WIRES HERE
SOCKET
014-1874
300" PHONE TERMINAL STRIP
O O
/
\
RED ——
RED
>—5013-18/4-25'6" SALON PHONE
BLACK
RED
DD 9015-18/4-45:5" FWD STRM PHONE
— BLACK
BLACK —— — —
“ERRE:
NOTES:
1) DO NOT TERMINATE WIRES TO GROUND TERMINAL OF SHORE PHONE/TY INLET,
2) WHITE AND BLACK CONDUCTORS IN PHONE CABLE UNUSED,
6.32 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
1
TV AND STEREO ANTENNA SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-612
(FIG. 6.33.1)
SHORE COAX
= ОТБ SHORE INLET
A
GLOMEX
TV.
HT | GAIN
5006 5 (CONTROL
AMP
N 5079
OUT 3 WAY OUT
SPUITTER
OUT
5003
5020
SALON 2065
TV/VCR COMBO
NOTE:
MASTER 1 DO NOT GROUND SHORE COAX GROUND ISOLATOR CASE.
GUEST
STATEROOM STATEROOM
ITV OUTLET TV/VCR COMBO
BOAT TV ANTENNA
20/9
POWERED STEREO ANTENNA
———4 =
0/1
—
_
Y ADAPTER
2004
BRIDGE
STEREO
SALON
STEREO
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.33
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
a AM
WINDLASS WIRING SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-614
(Fra. 6.34.1)
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| / WINDLASS |
REF ОМС TO PORT SOLENOID | BREAKER
09-801 — ———— LOAD SIDE 2 RED — 105 6 RED —
| |
| \ / |
| |
WINDLASS
| | Е MOUNTING BOLT
| | 4 GRN
CONTROL STATION | | Ll
| | —
SWITCH PANEL == | MAIN DC | MAIN DC
CONTROL STATION GROUND BUSS
REF 14-802 DC GROUND BUSS | AREARER PANEL |
REF 14-850 |
WINDLASS — ок |
MAIN — | 6 | WINDLASS DOIN
< 11 | | K SWITCHES
| |
WINDLASS > 8 2 STBD EXTENSION | WINDLASS |
CONTROL | NIST LARNESS | LATCHING |
< | o | SOLENOID | 6 RED/VIO — 2 ВК
AH REF DWG 09-804 | |
| |
ки SL | | O
| | + > =
PLUG & CAP 5 | | © N СЕ =
| | IN =
| | STBD ENGINE
| | GROUND TERMINAL
| |
| |
| |
| |
| | 6 RED/VIO
CAP 8 PLUG 99 ; | Vi
7 |<+ 568-16 WHT/BLU | 568-16 WHT/BLU 2 RED +)
8 |< 569-16 WHT/BLU 2 569-16 WHT/BLU &/ `
9 |< 570-16 RED 3 570-16 RED — — с M2
101 <+ 571-16 RED/VIO 4 571-16 RED/VIO Var
5 PLUG & CAP 25
: CONTROL BOX
~~ > BILGE HARNESS
REF DWG 09-802
566-16 BLUE
567-16 GREEN 14 BLK
\_ J
6.34 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
a NN
WESTERBEKE DIESEL GENERATOR REMOTE WIRING SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-619
(FIG. 6.35.1) o В
| PART OF EXTINGUISHER MODULE
PLUG CAP
NOT USED NOT USED
14 WT/RED ———3—
14 WHT/RED
© ©
| GENERIC WESTERBEKE DIESEL
| CAP > UE PLUG САР 15 POSITION CAP
8 7 JUVPER 1 |< 14 WHT/RED 14 RED/VIO 4 | 1-1 >— 14 RED/VIO —
2 << 4614 14 WHT/RED ——>| 2-| >— 14 WHT/RED are
3 - 14 WET 14 YEL/RED 3.1 >— 14 YEL/RED © 2 o— + 120€
; ; ; ; 4 |< 14 RED/WHT 14 BLK ——>| 4 | >— 14 BLK 218 АВТ
< | 5 | <«— 14 RED/VIO 14 REDNT HS | 5 | += 14 REDAIHT 3 ° 9
a т : 6 | <—t 14 YEL/RED 14 4HT (> 6 > 14 MH 299
START/STOP PREHEAT | 16 YEL > 7 > 16 YEL ons +
\ ©
- 16 ORN— 8 - 16 09\ — ——— GROUND
14 RED/YIO | > | >
14 RED/VIO
CIRCUIT | CIRCUIT 2 - 16 RED/WHT +> | 9° >— 16 RED/WHT
PART OF DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL | 16 BLK ——> 0 > 16 BLK _ TB-2
16 MHT/RED >> | 1 > 16 WHT/RED — De oT НЕАТ
Е. ; o 3 o
16 BLK/WHT 4—> | 12 | > 18 BLK/AHT 51 GO OIL PRESSURE
| © 5 ©—— WATER TEMP
= |B > обе
UNUSED 4 -> | 14 | > Er
©9 0
=> |B | > д пе
=
с
— = Lu
us CE CT =
= о © = o
NOTE: A
1) CONNECTORS ARE AMP MATE-N-LOK 11, USE PINS IN PLUGS ANNAN Lor ys EOF SYSTEMS MONITOR
| 2 3 4
AND SOCKETS IN CAPS, |
N | PLUG ———— 16 BLK/WHT al EN
| OIL
16 WHT/RED 37 GEN
GENERATOR REMOTE
INSTRUMENTS LEN.
e J
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 6.35
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
1
AC WIRING (240VAC) SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-631 (1 oF 2)
(F1G. 6.36.1)
NOTES: 1) DENOTES SLIDE SHUTTLE. ONLY ONE SOURCE
CAN BE ENERGIZED AT A TIME,
TO ISOLA ELON IRANSFORMER 2) AC SOURCE NEUTRALS, AND_ALL EQUIPMENT
: SELTE LL CRANES, ENDEN RE 85 SER hy
| | Ш E THE AC NEUTRAL/GROUNDING BUS.
BLK | WHT 3) ALL EQUIPMENT NEUTRALS RETURN TO THE LOAD
а СРМ NEUTRAL BUS BAR ON THE AC NEUTRAL/GROUNDING
RED а САМ BUS.
4) IMPORTANT: NEUTRAL & GROUND ARE TIED TOGETHER
GENERATOR SUA] ABLE UT TUEME NEUTRAUZROORDINE AUS. NEUTRAL AND
GENERATOR AC SOURCE JE А, QUO ROD 8, EERE 8 heh Fle Sar
вк! © 5 A GROUNDING BUS BAR о
240 VAC TN E
e— | / |! ©
OU EL | y LOAD NEUTRAL BUS BAR
| 5
POWER _ LA _ POWER_ в ся
OH OT 7 XX AC NEUTRAL/GROUNDING BUS
TT 1/2A
| MDP GROUNDING STUD
PANEL MAIN BREAKERS Ш
GENERATOR | 50
NOTE |
y lL a NOTE |
16 LK /7
16 RED —
VOLTS à Au
— 16 BLK — o
— 16 BED ÓN AN
VOLTS AMPS
3 BLK 68 RED МОР | 20VAC LOAD
240VAC LOAD SB
[4/3 AIR CONDITIONER PUMP RELAY. с 670 GALLEY SYSTEMS —— 14/3
FWD AIR CONDITIONER 13 | [CO PORT SYSTEMS 15
12/3
105 +15 AC CONVERTER — 10/3
17/3 SALON AIR CONDITIONER 55 | $— 10 >— ON ER —— 1473
| LS; ACCESSORY 14/3
14/3 STOVE
30° 8 RED
An | ——<20>—STBD SYSTEMS —— 14/3
14/3 WATER HEATER Te >——20>— BILGE/COCKPIT —— 14/3
(EN
— 415 >— MICROWAVE 14/3
12/3 ACCESSORY LS
Xs | ив ВЕЕВУСЕВАТОВ/ 4/7
LOO WASHER/DRYER —— 14/3
6.36
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
f A
AC WIRING (240VAC) SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-631 (2 or 2)
(Вс. 6.37.1)
NOTE:
1) NEUTRAL WIRE FOR 240V INPUT NOT INSTALLED IN CABLE
MASTER SHORE CORD ON BOATS W/ SHORE POWER TRANSFORMERS.
2) INCOMING SHORE GROUND IS CONNECTED ONLY TO
THE SHIELD OF THE ISOLATION TRANSFORMER AND
15 NOT GROUNDED ON THE BOAT,
PER BOAT CABLE
ВЕ 50 AMP „6 — N
<LI BLK | — BLA | | ve
| | | | С >
| | | |
LINE SHORE PONER PLUG | “Tte RED mi TES _ 1© ©
240VAC/50A | © | NOTE €
; <— CCR — GAN y D OT #
| | ee - — С ) |
+! — BA DE
o С > = |
—— HT SD
ISO BOOST REMOTE CONNECTION (OPT) MEF mE | — RED < Я) o ) = |
NOTE | — 690 C > SEC PRI
ES —— GAN D OH. (BOAT GNDING!
8 ] RED MAIN OVERRIDE ( )
B | 2 — — В.К POWER TRANSFORMER
la WHT BOOST N N
a ORN LOW VOLTAGE 2404 PRIMARY
[a | 5 ——BLU COMON CONNECTION TO CASE NS SECONDARY
x GROUND
(OPTIONAL)
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 6.37
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
AC WIRING (220/50H2) SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-633 (1 oF 2)
(FIG. 6.38.1)
GENERATOR | LINE | LINE 2
a TO ISOLATION TO ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER VAIN DC TRANSFORMER
REF SHEET 2 GROUND BUS REF SHEET 2
LT | |
BLU LT LT
8/3 BLU BLU
BRN | GRN BRN | GRN BRN | GRN 12/3
BOAT CABLE 8/3 AC NEUTRAL / BOAT CABLE
BOAT CABLE а CAN GROUNDING BUS A=- +
OD < | E
|
| | АС SOURCE NEUTRAL & COMMON
| o
LOAD NEUTRAL BUS BAR 9
GROUNDING BUS BAR
| 6 LT BLUSH + | |
| 5 UA — 16 BN _ E POWER |
| a 5 — 16 LT BLU |
POWER 3% Lig BR MDF GROUNDING 16 LT BLU— TU |
o ` STUD 16 BRN— — € | POWER |
| O — 16 LT BLU |
| POWER | % Li6ERN |
| |
| 8 BRN |
| SEE |
| NOTE | ce N/A | |
| |
| | |
LINE | | GEN SHORE | | LINE 2
| MAIN 35 AMP MAIN |
| BREAKERS 35AMP | BREAKERS
| | | |
| IN E = — |
| [6 BRN 10 BRN — 16 LT BLU — ah |
| VOLTS 16 LT BLUE | 16 BRN — VOL TS |
| |
| ah |
AMES | AMPS
| | |
| RN aaa 1 10 BRN |
| 14/3 — GALLEY SYSTEMS < 10 Y | | < 10 À STBD SYSTEMS 14/3
| | NOTES: | |
| 14/3 PORT SYSTEMS < 10 + | |. DENOTES SLIDE SHUTTLE, ONLY ONE SOURCE | 10 > BILGE/COCKPIT 14/3 |
| | CAN BE ENERGIZED AT A TIME. | |
| | 2. AC SOURCE NEUTRALS, AND ALL EQUIPMENT | |
| 14/3 AEFRICERATOR/ py SAFTY GROUNDS RETURN TO THE AC SOURCE 110 WATER HEATER 14/3
| | NEUTRAL AND COMMON GROUNDING BUS BAR ON | |
| | THE AC NEUTRAL/GROUNDING BUS. | AN |
| 14/3 MICROWAVE — 10 =$ | 3. ALL EQUIPMENT NEUTRALS RETURN TO THE | pe 20 — SIOVE 12/3
| | LOAD NEUTRAL BUS BAR ON THE AC |
| уз AIR CONDITIONER 751 NEUTRAL /GROUNDING BUS. | HD AIR 17 |
| PUMP RELAY | 4, IMPORTANT: NEUTRAL & GROUND ARE TIED | CONDITIONER |
| | TOGETHER AT THE AC NEUTRAL/GROUNDING BUS. | |
| 1273 SALON AIR on] NEUTRAL AND GROUNDING CONDUCTORS SHALL | RX > ACCESSORY XXX |
| CONDITIONER BE KEPT ISOLATED AT ALL OTHER LOCATIONS
ON BOARD THE VESSEL.
| 10/3 AC CONVERTER — 10 Y | 10 WASHER/DRYER 14/3 |
| | | |
| 1473 BOW THRUSTER 45 Y | | yy ACCESSORY XXX |
| CONVERTOR | | |
\_ J
6.38 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
1
AC WIRING (220/50HZ) SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-633 (2 or 2)
(FIG. 6.39.1)
LINE |
SHORE POWER INLET
220VAC/32A
LINE 2
SHORE POWER INLET
220VAC/ 16A
| >—LEN
>
NOTE:
I] INCOMING SHORE GROUND 1S CONNECTED ONLY TO
THE SHIELD OF THE ISOLATION TRANSFORMER AND
[S NOT GROUNDED ON THE BOAT,
SP ER
/ \
35 AMP | J >
| \
| | | |
| |
| | | |
| | NOTE
| i | _
— А
A REF SHEET |
—LT BLU
SEC PR
Eo (BOAT GNDING]
TRANSFORMER AN
220V PRIMARY
220V SECONDARY
CONNECTION TO CASE 7, ЭКУА
GROUND
So ER
/ N
25 AMP | / >
] \
| \
| |
| | | |
| | | |
— — | ; |
\ /
BOAT CABLE ed
ve REF SHEET | = =
SEC PAI
(BOAT GNDING]
TRANSFORMER AC
| 220Y PRIMARY
220V SECONDARY
CONNECTION TO CASE 7, ЭКУА
GROUND
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
6.39
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
STOVE Tor SWITCH SCHEMATIC
DRAWING NO. 09-635
(FIG. 6.40.1)
NOTES: STOVE TOP REMOTE MICRO SWITCH N/C
1) RELAYS SHOWN IN DEENERGIZED POSITION, SWITCH SHOWN WITH
STOVE COVER IN PLACE. NC
2) JUMPER TO BE INSTALLED BY PERSON WIRING THE RELAY. v
7 — 4
STOVE BREAKER le BLK € ©
_ 9 —
REF DWG 09-631 12 RED Г 52 STOVE 240VAC
LT Г Г]
SEE NOTE 2 €
AC =
GROUNDING BUS l2 GRN
STANDARD 740VAC/60H7
STOVE TOP REMOTE MICRO SWITCH N/C
NC 7
STOVE BREAKER о 6
REF DWG 09-833 7 > 12 BRN | >
NEUTRAL 8US 12 LT BLU А STOVE 220VAC
© )
= >
GROUNDING BUS l2 GRN
STANDARD 220VAC/50HZ
6.40 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
1
SMART CRAFT SYSTEM W/ SYSTEM VIEW WIRING
DRAWING NO. 09-701
(Fra. 6.41.1)
NOTES:
© 1) CHI = CUSTOMER HELM INTERFACE.
PORT DCM 2) PCM = PROPULSION CONTROL MODULE.
3) CAN = CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK SYSTEM TYPE OF COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL USED FOR DATA TRANSFER.
© 4) TERMINATOR = RESISTOR DESIGNED TO REDUCE NOISE AND PROVIDE PROPER VOLTAGE LEVELS ON THE CAN BUS CIRCUIT. (REMOVE CUMMINS TERMINATOR FROM ENGINE & PLACE © THE DCM.)
: 5) DEPTH TRANSDUCER PLUGS INTO DIAGNOSTIC PORT.
©
6) POSITION "AT UNSWITCHED +12V (STBD), POSITION "F™ SWITCHED
+12V FROM STBD KEY SWITCH 6 DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL, POSITION "B" NEGATIVE.
© 7) UNSWITCHED +12V FROM MAIN DC BREAKER PANEL 8 NEGATIVE
FROM MAIN DC NEGATIVE BUS. (PART OF BOATS WIRING
8) NOT USED ON PORT ENGINE.
NOTE 8
DCX
PART OF BOAT
WIRING
SHIPS MAIN DC
NOTE 8 NEGATIVE BUS
\_ —] A |6- PORT FUEL 01]
| REL AY <= €; 16-FINK/RED TANK SENDER
> <CHS : -
В № NOTE 7
FUSE PART OF BOAT = SYSTEM VIEW
\_ WIRING CUMMINS
DATA wv > 30"
CUMMINS PART OF BOAT
~<—E J TERMINATOR LOCATED IN WIRING
NOTE 4
NOTE 8
N al]
NOTE 6 CHI HARNESS J
47
12" 42 53” J = ever]
| e" _
LOCATED AT a à WHT/BLU + "NMEA 0183
© dB
STBD DCM CONTROL STATION BLU/WHT - | CONNECTION
N WARNING HORN a
A GRY я
GRY A —=9 RED 9 Г
B RED RED =: EF: ¡a
17 BRN/BLK C Od —
NOTE 5
AIR TEMP
SENSOR
PART OF CHI HARNESS
D BRN/BLK BLK
O-
AU
| IL ° о ITEM | arv. DESCRIPTION SUPER PRT SEA RAY PART#
Les < MENS OAT Ol WITH CT Ae AR TEMP SENSOR 3/95 /5K 1610389
SHES MAIN LC 02 4 SPIN LOCK NUT - 5" 06 036 630 1690382
03 2 4 IN | GAUGE - 5" 02 069 004 1609007
04 2 TACHOMETER - 4K - 5" 02 068 004 1690513
<> [3 18-PINK/GRN STBD FUEL 05 2 SC 1000 HARNESS 30° 879968830 1690514
5 ) с С TANK SENDER De - - - _
|| 07 2 J BOX 4 WAY 87849284 1507326
RELAY 08 2 TERMINATOR-RESISTOR 85931881 1507334
\_ 09 | SC 1000 HARNESS 6" 8799686 1509318
<< de (+) 10 _ _ _ -
- \_ CUMMING —— NOTE y Ц
AMP EH Ne R = 12 DEPTH / TEMP TRANSDUCER INYLON) 8819338! 1690371
FUSE CUMVINS 13 STEERING SENSOR ASSEMBLY 862318874 1610427
=H THE DATA 14 | STEERING EXT HARNESS 364219A! 1689718
NOTE 4 15 DCM KIT, (CUMMINS 480C-E) ASM_DCM_0001 1689740
16 - - - -
17 - - - -
18 - - - -
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 6.41
19. AC & DC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS & WIRING HARNESSES (CONTINUED)
-
SEA RAY NAVIGATOR INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
DRAWING NO. 09-703
(Fıc. 6.42.1)
ITEM | QTY. DESCRIPTION MAPTECH # SEA RAY PART
1 SEA RAY NAVIGATOR 10.4 (PACKAGE) SRHWPACKIO 1619352
1 SEA RAY NAVIGATOR 12.1 (PACKAGE) SRHWPACKIZ 1619378
О! 1 COMPUTER MODEL 10.4 SRCHWIO 1619360
02 COMPUTER MODEL 12.1 SRCHWIZ 1619386
0 ся [62]
SRN POWER SUPPLY /GPS RECEIVER,
03 1 CABLE KIT, USB EXT FOR KEYBOARD SRPSCOMBO 1690075
PARALLEL EXTENSION FOR CD-ROM
04 | DEPTH/TEMP X-DUCER W/PIGTAIL (NYLON) | SRDTTPIGTAIL 1690359
05 | DEPTH/TEMP X-DUCER EXT. HARN. - 30" |SRDTTHARNESS30 1690360
06 | DEPTH/TEMP X-DUCER EXT. HARN. - 60° |SRDTTHARNESS60 169036!
07 1 MOUSE W/CABLE SRCMOUSE 1619311
08 | [SR GPS ANTENNA W/20"' CABLE & BNC CONN. |SRCGPSANTENNA 1619379
09 © BNC CONNECTOR + 1586360 =
10 | BNC COUPLER + 1688702 RE
1619345
REVOTE CD DRIVE SRCCDDRIVE ES 8
| OWNERS PACKET-SRN SOF TWARE SROWNERSKIT 1690077
PARALLEL EXTENSION CABLE
FOR CD-ROM DRIVE
USB EXTENSION CABLE
FOR KEY BOARD
2
INLINE CONNECTOR
NMEA DATA OUT
WHT (+)
BLK (-) a)
ELECTRONICS FUSE BLOCK CHART PLOTTER
15 AMP FUSE
\_ J
6.42
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
1. LAYOUT AND ACCESSORIES
Figures 7.18.1 and 7.19.1 identify the location and
arrangement of the equipment and components on
your yacht. We strongly suggest that you walk
through your yacht, locate the features illustrated,
and become familiar with their operation and
maintenance.
2. CARBON MONOXIDE MONITORS
The 450 EB is equipped with a carbon monoxide
(CO) monitors throughout the boat. The CO
monitor is an electronic instrument that detects
carbon monoxide. When there is a build-up of CO
in any room, the monitor in that room will alert the
occupants by a flashing a DANGER light and
sounding an alarm. The CO monitors are powered
through a breaker on the DC Distribution panel at
the control station.
f A
CARBON MONOXIDE MONITOR
(Fıc. 7.1.1)
POWER
Ра INDICATOR
DANGER
—] — INDICATOR
TEST
BUTTON
(ON SIDE)
|___— HORN
\. J
f в
Actuation of the CO monitor indicates the presence of
carbon monoxide which can be FATAL.
EVACUATE THE PREMISES IMMEDIATELY. DO AHEAD
COUNT TO CHECK THAT ALL PERSONS ARE
ACCOUNTED FOR. CALL THE NEAREST FIRE
DEPARTMENT AND ASK THEM TO DETERMINE THE
SOURCE OF CARBON MONOXIDE. DO NOT REENTER
PREMISES UNTIL IT HAS BEEN AIRED OUT AND THE
| PROBLEM IS CORRECTED.
This detector will only indicate the presence of carbon
monoxide gas at the sensor. Carbon monoxide may
be present in other areas.
= J
It is important that you read and understand
the CO monitor information and operating
instructions. It is extremely important that you
become familiar with the CO monitor and its
functions.
A. TESTING THE CO MONITOR
Test the monitors on your boat for at manufacturers
required intervals by pushing the TEST button on
the side of the unit. If the unit is operating correctly
both audible and visual warning indicators will be
activated.
f в
To reduce the risk of carbon monoxide poisoning, test
the monitor operation when not in use for 10 days or
| more.
J
REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION
MANUAL IN THE OWNERS MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
3. AIR CONDITIONING & HEATING
The 450 EB air conditioning/heating system
consists of two (2) standard air conditioning/heating
units, a raw water pump with seacock and strainer
and a relay unit so the water pump will be activated
by demand when any AC unit comes on.
Care should be taken so as not to stow items around
the air handlers that may block the return air grill or
damage the freon lines running to the compressor.
The air filters for each unit should be removed and
cleaned periodically to assure fresh, clean air
circulation and to reduce stress on the unit.
The master stateroom unit is located under the
the bunk. The controls for the unit are located on
the port hanging closet wall. The removable air filter
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
7.1
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
f >)
AIR CONDITIONING/HEATING LOCATIONS
(Fic. 7.2.1)
MASTER
STATEROOM
AIR HANDLER
(7000 BTU)
AIR HANDLER
(24000 BTU)
\ J
can be accessed by lifting the hatch under the
bottom of the bunk mattress.
The salon unit is a 24,000 BTU unit which also
services the Guest Stateroom. The unit is located
on the starboard side of the utility room and can be
accessed by lifting the electrically activated hatch
in the floor of the salon. The controls for the unit are
located on the aft port side of the salon entry doors.
The removable air filter is located on the face of the
unit. The salon unit
The system is cooled to maintain optimal operating
temperature by the raw water pump located in the
bilge. The pump draws water through a seacock and
filters it through a sea water strainer. The water
passes through each compressor cooling the
condensing coils, then flows overboard through
various thru-hull drains. (The sea water strainer
should be inspected frequently and cleaned out when
plugged. To clean strainer, refer to Section 4- Bilge
& Underwater Gear, pg. 4.11, Seacocks & Strainers).
The condensation drains for all the compressor
units connect into the common drain.
A. TO START SYSTEM:
1. Make sure the seacock for the cooling water
pump is open.
2. Turn ON the A/C WATER PUMP/RELAY circuit
breaker on the main AC distribution panel. Turn
ON each A/C UNIT circuit breaker located on
the same panel.
3. Refer to air conditioner owner’s manual in the
owner’s packet for instructions on operation of
the control panels.
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
4. WATER SYSTEM
The fresh water system consists of two (2) 50
gallon (189.27 liter) water tanks, two (2) 12 volt
water pumps, water heater and accumulator tank.
The fresh water system is activated by the fresh
water pump breakers on the salon 12VDC distribution
panel. The breakers must be ON to operate the head,
shower, ice maker, fresh water washdowns and
faucets. The hot and cold water lines throughout
the boat are color coded: RED (hot) and BLUE
(cold).
7.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
A. WATER TANKS
The water tanks are located outboard of the port
and starboard outboard stringers under the salon
FRESH WATER TANKS
(Fra. 7.3.1)
(A) WATER TANKS FILL
PORT TANK VENT
© PORT WATER TANK
(©) STARBOARD TANK VENT
® STARBOARD WATER TANK
No J
® STARBOARD INBOARD STRINGER
© PORT OUTBOARD STRINGER
® STARBOARD TANK WATER FILL
M STARBOARD TANK VENT
FRESH WATER LINES ROUTING
(FIG. 7.3.2)
(E) PORT WATER TANK
(© ACCUMULATOR TANK
(© FRESH WATER PUMPS
(D ENGINE ROOM FORWARD BULKHEAD
(A) STARBOARD WATER TANK
BILGE WASHDOWN
© DOCKSIDE WATER INLET
(© TRANSOM WASHDOWN
f =
FRESH WATER LINES ROUTING
(Fra. 7.3.3) °°
® © ©
NN
N
№
N
\
\
\
WN
Y
h у
J
/
М
“a
ALA
o
Z
xs
CX
® MANIFOLD
© MASTER STATEROOM HEAD
(O) GUEST STATEROOM SHOWER — (В) MASTER STATEROOM SHOWER
(A ANCHOR WASHDOWN
GUEST STATEROOM HEAD
(D) GUEST STATEROOM SINK
(E) TO WATER HEATER, WASHER/
DRYER 8 BRIDGE SINK
D MASTER STATEROOM SINK
© TRANSOM SHOWER
\. J
floor. To check the water level in the tank, press the
water level switch on the 12 volt DC distribution panel
located in the salon. The lights will indicate the
amount of water in the tank.
FILLING THE WATER TANK
The water tanks are filled through a fill plate located
on the port deck walkway. Fill the tanks only from a
source known to provide safe, pure drinking water.
To fill your water tanks you should use a plastic
hose. Do not use a rubber hose; it can give the
water a disagreeable flavor. The hose should be
kept for filling use only. After using the hose it should
be emptied. Start at one end and raise the hose to
shoulder level and walk to the opposite end of the
hose, allowing the remaining water to flow out. You
should store your water tank filling hose in a clean
dry place. It is also a good practice to cover the
ends of the hose to keep the inside clean.
To BEGIN INITIAL OPERATION:
1. Fill the water tank with potable water.
2. Switch the water pump breakers to the ON
position.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
7.3
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
3. One at atime, open all hot and cold faucets to
bleed air from the water lines.
4. Once air has been eliminated from water lines,
close faucets.
5. Shutting off the last faucet should cause the
pump to shut off.
SANITIZING THE WATER SYSTEM
Although your dealer initially sanitizes the water
system, if the system has not been used for a long
period of time, or you suspect it may be
contaminated, use a water treatment additive to
sanitize the potable water system. Water treatment
additives are available at marine/RV supply stores.
If water treatment additives are not available, adhere
to the following procedure for complete sanitation
of your potable water system.
1. Prepare a chlorine solution using one (1) gallon
of water and one (1) cup Clorox or Purex
household bleach (5% Hypochlorite solution).
With tank empty, pour chlorine solution into
tank, using one (1) gallon solution for each sixty
(60) gallons of tank capacity.
2. Complete filling of tank with fresh water. Open
each faucet until air has been released and the
entire system is filled.
3. Allow to stand for three (3) hours.
Drain and flush with potable fresh water.
5. To remove excessive chlorine taste or odor
which might remain, prepare a solution of four
(4) quarts of vinegar to twenty (20) gallons of
water and allow this solution to agitate in the
tank for several days by vehicle motion.
6. Drain tank and again flush with potable water.
7. Replace water filter.
B. WATER Pumps & FILTER
The pumps for the fresh water system are located
on the forward engine room bulkhead.
FRESH WATER PUMPS
(FG. 7.4.1)
(A) FRESH WATER PUMPS
ACCUMULATOR TANK
O ENGINE ROOM FORWARD BULKHEAD
Na A
The pumps are activated by the FRESH WATER
PUMP breakers on the salon 12VDC main
distribution panel.
A filter is situated on the input side of the pumps
to filter any particles that may have
accumulated in the water tank. The filter should
be checked and cleaned periodically.
Before servicing the system, turn the FRESH
WATER PUMP breakers OFF and release
pressure on the system by opening a faucet.
C. WATER SYSTEM PRESSURIZATION
Water system pressure is regulated by a pneumatic
accumulator bottle (See figure 7.4.1) located inline
on the cold water outlet from the pump.
The accumulator tank smooths water flow and
reduces on/off cycling of the pumps by lessening
the variation in pressure and flow between the pump
and the outlets in the system.
The even flow of water gives better control of hot
water adjustment at the faucet.
The reduced on/off cycling reduces noise from the
pump motor, and from shock pressures (pipe
hammer). It also reduces battery drain, and gives
longer pump life.
74
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
D. WATER DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLD
The water distribution manifold directs fresh water
from the water tanks and the water heater to the
various equipment throughout the yacht.The
manifold can be accessed by lifting the floor hatch
In the stateroom companionway.
If away from the boat for an extended period of time
it is suggested that you relieve the hose pressure
of the fresh water system by turning OFF the
FRESH WATER PUMP breaker on the DC main
distribution panel and then opening a faucet on the
boat.
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
E. WATER HEATER
The 8.5 gallon (32.2 liters) water heater is located
in the forward area of the utility room and can be
accessed by lifting the electrically activated utility
1
WATER HEATER
(FIG. 7.5.1)
(E) COLD FEED TO WASHER/DRYER
(OPTIONAL)
(E) COLD WATER FROM WATER TANKS
©) HOT FEED TO WASHER/DRYER (© DRAIN TO CABIN SUMP
(A WATER HEATER
STARBOARD WATER TANK
© PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
(OPTIONAL) (H) HOT WATER FEED TO SYSTEM
< J
room hatch in the aft salon floor. The water heater
is powered by a breaker on the 240VAC main
distribution panel located in the salon.
The water heater has a check valve to prevent hot
water from back-washing into the cold water source
and a pressure relief valve to avoid damage to the
heater from over pressure or excessive
temperature.
Make certain the hot water lines are air
free, indicating the water heater is full.
Damage will occur to water heater if it is not
full when turned on.
Na A
INITIAL START-UP OR AFTER WINTERIZATION:
1. Make sure the WATER HEATER breaker on the
240VAC distribution panel is OFF.
2. Fill the heater with water.
3. Open the hot water faucets until all air is
eliminated from the system.
4. Make certain the heater is full of water.
COMPLETE FAILURE OF THE HEATING
ELEMENTS WILL RESULT IF THEY ARE
NOT COMPLETELY IMMERSED IN WATER
AT ALL TIMES.
5. Turn the WATER HEATER breaker ON.
To maintain water heater properly, drain whenever
the possibility of freezing occurs and frequently
inspect lines and connections for leaks.
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
F. DOCKSIDE WATER INLET
* DO NOT leave boat unattended with the dockside
water hose connected.
e Dockside water should be connected during periods
of heavy water usage only.
N J
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
75
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
DOCKSIDE INLET
(Fıc. 7.6.1)
(A) DOCKSIDE INLET
TRANSOM STORAGE
\. J
The dockside water inlet, located in the transom
storage, port side, allows use of a dockside water
source to provide water for the boat's fresh water
system .
To UsE THE SYSTEM:
1. Make sure the “FRESH WATER PUMP”
breakers are OFF.
2. Remove the plug from the face of the dockside
water inlet.
3. Connect a drinking water hose to the water outlet
on the dock, then to the dockside water inlet on
the boat and turn on the water at the dock.
All fresh water faucets and showers are now usable.
To disconnect the system, reverse the procedure,
making sure the plug is reinstalled tightly.
G. COCKPIT SHOWER
The cockpit shower has a hot and cold control and
shower wand which are located in a receptacle on
the port aft cockpit. Squeeze the button on the
shower wand to dispense water and turn the knob
COCKPIT SHOWER
(Fıc. 7.6.2)
to adjust water temperature. The FRESH WATER
PUMP breakers on the main distribution panel must
be ON to operate the shower.
H. GRAY WATER SUMP
Your yacht is equipped with a gray water/
condensate sump located between the port and
SHOWER SUMP
(FIG. 7.6.3)
(A) SHOWER SUMP
SALON A/C CONDENSATE
(C) OVERFLOW TO CABIN SUMP— (9) GUEAST HEAD FLOOR DRAIN
(E) MASTER HEAD SHOWER
(G) GUEST HEAD SHOWER
© GALLEY SINK (1) GUEST HEAD SINK
(E) MASTER HEAD SINK
7.6
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
starboard inboard stringers under the forward
campanionway hatch.. Gray water from the head
systems, galley systems and salon air conditioner
condensation drain into the sump.
The sump pump is fully automatic and protected
by breakers on the main DC breaker panel on the
forward bulkhead of the bilge. Periodically remove
the clear cover, check and clean the pump and
float switch. Check the pump and float switch for
obstructions and proper working order. The sump
pump comes on when there is enough water in the
sump to raise the float switch and start the pump. If
it does not come on after one or two gallons of water
drain from the shower, turn the water off and check
the pump and float switch for proper operation. An
overflow sump is located in the utility room under
the water heater. This sump is utilized only if the
sump pump fails and the water in the shower sump
reaches the overflow tube in the shower sump.
After using the shower, it is recommended that you
run a gallon of clean water through the shower drain
to clean out soap residue.
I. FRESH WATER WASHDOWN
The 450 EB is equipped with three (3) fresh water
spigots; one in the bilge located forward center
between the port and starboard inboard stringers,
one in the bow locker and one in the transom
storage locker. The washdowns come with a 12-
foot hose and a strap for storage when not in
use. The system uses water from the fresh water
tank. The FRESH WATER PUMP breakers on
the salon 12VDC distribution panel must be ON
to operate the system.
n
WASHDOWN SPIGOT
(A WASHDOWN SPIGOT
ENGINE ROOM FORWARD BULKHEAD
© TRANSOM STORAGE LOCKER
©) BOW STORAGE LOCKER
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
77
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
5. HEAD SYSTEM
The standard head system on your Sea Ray*
includes two (2) holding tanks with dockside pump-
out and fluid level indicators. A macerator and
overboard discharge seacock is available as an
option. Below is a description of the head system
and options. You should be aware of whether your
boat is equipped with the optional overboard
discharge system and read the section pertaining
to it. The owner's packet in your boat contains
information pertaining to your head system that
should be read carefully.
A. REQUIREMENTS FOR VESSEL OPERATORS
The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
standards state that in freshwater lakes, freshwater
~
Do not flush facial tissue, paper towels or sanitary
napkins in head.
1
HEAD SYSTEM
(Fic. 7.8.1)
(A) STARBOARD HOLDING TANK
VENT FILTER
DOCKSIDE PUMPOUT
© STARBOARD HOLDING TANK
© MACERATOR (OPTIONAL)
(E) MACERATOR SEACOCK
(OPTIONAL)
(E) PORT VUCUUM GENERATOR ©
© PORT HOLDING TANK
® PORT HOLDING TANK VENT
FILTER
(1) STARBOARD VACUUM
GENERATOR
© MASTER HEAD
(K) TO PORT VACUUM
GENERATOR
© TO STARBOARD VACUUM
GENERATOR
(M) GUEST HEAD
7.8
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
reservoirs or other freshwater impoundments
whose inlets or outlets are such as to prevent the
ingress or egress by vessel traffic subject to this
regulation, or in rivers not capable of navigation by
interstate vessel traffic subject to this regulation,
marine sanitation devices certified by the U.S. Coast
Guard installed on all vessels shall be designed and
operated to prevent the overboard discharge of
sewage, treated or untreated, or of any waste
derived from sewage. The EPA standards further
state that this shall not be construed to prohibit the
carriage of Coast Guard-certified flow through
treatment devices which have been secured so as
to prevent such discharges. They also state that
waters where a Coast Guard certified marine
sanitation device permitting discharge is allowed
include coastal waters and estuaries, the Great
Lakes and interconnecting waterways, freshwater
lakes and impoundments accessible through locks,
and other flowing waters that are navigable interstate
by vessels subject to this regulation (40 CFR 140.3).
B. VAacu-FLusH* HEAD
The Vacu-Flush® head utilizes the HEAD breakers
on the DC distribution panel in the salon. Individual
breakers on the DC distribution panel control the
GUEST HEAD and MASTER HEAD. The foot pedal
at the base of the toilet opens a mechanical seal
and vacuum forces waste through the opening in
the bowl to the vacuum generator, through the
vacuum pump and then to the holding tank.
To OPERATE VACU-FLUSH® HEAD:
1. Turn ON the FRESH WATER PUMP breaker.
2. Turn ON the HEAD SYSTEM breaker.
3. If there is no water in bowl, lift foot pedal until
enough water fills the bowl.
4. To flush, depress foot pedal to floor until bowl
IS clear.
C. HOLDING TANK OPERATION
Waste from the heads are directed into either of
the 30 gallon holding tanks located forward of
the port and starboard engines. Holding tank fluid
level indicators are located on the DC distribution
panel in the salon and in each head. The
indicators show FULL-DO NOT FLUSH, 1/2 and
POWER. When the FULL-DO NOT FLUSH light
Is on, the holding tank must be emptied before
the head can be reused. However it would be a
good practice to empty the holding tank when
the 1/2 light is on to avoid overflowing the holding
tank and ruining the vent filter.
DOCKSIDE PUMP-OUT
To empty the holding tank, the services of a
dockside pump out station will be needed. Follow
4
WASTE LEVEL INDICATOR AND DISCHARGE CONTROL
(Fic. 7.9.1)
WASTE SYSTEM CONTROL
FULL
DO NOT FLUSH
1/2
ЕМРТУ
POWER
NOTICE
WITH SWITCH ON:
INDICATOR ON - NORMAL
INDICATOR OFF - CHECK SEACOCK
DISCHARGE OF SEWAGE DIRECTLY OVERBOARD
IS FOR USE WHERE APPROVED ONLY.
SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS OF OVERBOARD DISCHARGE VALVES
= J
INDIVIDUAL HEAD - WASTE LEVEL INDICATOR
(Fıc. 7.9.2)
WASTE LEVEL SUMP
® 8
POWER 72 NOT FLUSH
J
Instructions at the station and make sure pump out
station hose is inserted into the deck plate marked
WASTE, located on the starboard deck walkway.lf
equipped, the holding tank can also be emptied by
the optional macerator. See MACERATOR
DISCHARGE PUMP in this section.
D. VENT FILTER
The vent filter is designed to control odors
associated with the head system operations. The
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
79
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
vent filter is located on the engine room forward
bulkhead. The filter must be changed at the
beginning of each boating season to be
effective. The vent filter is installed in-line on the
holding tank ventilation hose.
NOTE: Do not overfill the holding tank as this will
flood the vent filter and render it useless. Filter
replacement will then be required. See Parts Manual
for correct replacement filter.
6. MACERATOR DISCHARGE Pump
WITH SEACOCK INTERLOCK
SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
If equipped, the optional macerator gives the boat
operator the means of discharging the holding tank
contents directly overboard through a seacock in
the bottom of the hull. This is available in conjunction
with the dockside pump out.
NOTICE
f в
This boat may be equipped with an optional overboard
discharge valve.
Discharging of sewage directly overboard is for use
where approved only.
NOTICE
There is the possibility of being fined for having
an operable overboard discharge in U.S. waters.
Removing handle of seacock while in closed
position, or other means must be utilized to avoid
fine.
Since direct overboard discharge is prohibited in
many areas, the macerator seacock is normally
closed. The macerator seacock is equipped with
a system interlock switch which prevents the
operation of the macerator when the macerator
seacock is closed. The light on the MACERATOR
switch on the DC Distribution Panel will be lighted
when the macerator is operational. If the light is
not lighted, it is visual confirmation the macerator
seacock is closed and that the macerator cannot
be operated. Check that the macerator seacock
\. J
handle is in the open position and the light on the
switch is lighted before operating the macerator.
To OPERATE THE MACERATOR:
1. Turn ON the DISCHARGE PUMP breaker on
the salon DC distribution panel and open the
waste discharge seacock located on the bilge
floor (See Fig. 7.10.1 for seacock location).
2. Operate DISCHARGE switch under the
WASTE SYSTEM CONTROL area on the main
distribution panel.
3. When tank is empty, release the switch and
close waste discharge seacock.
MAINTENANCE
Prior to each use and at regularly scheduled
Intervals, cycle the macerator seacock handle open
and shut to ensure proper operation of the seacock
7. COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
The 450 EB is equipped with a land-line telephone
connection in the master stateroom and the salon.
These phones can be operated when dockside and
hooked up to the dockside telephone hookup.
DocKSIDE TELEPHONE AND IV Hookup
(FG. 7.10.1)
®
С
A,
3
(5) DOCKSIDE TELEPHONE HOOKUP
DOCKSIDE TV HOOKUP
N J
7.10
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
A. DocKSIDE TELEPHONE HOOoKUP
The dockside telephone hookup is located on the
port transom. A fifty foot shore cord with waterproof
connectors is supplied.
TO CONNECT TELEPHONE SYSTEM:
1. lift cover plate.
2. Connect shore cord to dock telephone inlet and
then to the boat inlet.
3. Telephone system is now operational.
REFER TO OWNER’'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
8. ENTERTAINMENT CENTERS
A. SALON ENTERTAINMENT CENTER
The salon entertainment center consists of a 20"
television/VCR/radio combination with remote
located in a cabinet in the aft salon. A stereo system
with CD changer and digital remote control &
selector switch for cockpit entertainment is located
below the TV. The CABIN MAIN and CABIN STEREO
MEMORY breakers on the Main DC Breaker Panel
must be ON to operate the systems.
B. SALON ENTERTAINMENT (OPTIONAL)
The optional salon entertainment center consists
of a 20" flat screen television with DVD/VCR
combination and remote.
C. MASTER STATEROOM ENTERTAINMENT
The master stateroom entertainment center
consists of a 13” television/VCR/radio combination
with remote control.
D. GUEST STATEROOM ENTERTAINMENT
The Guest stateroom entertainment center consists
of a 13” television/VCR/radio combination with
remote control. The TV is mounted on a swivel base
and can be positioned for easy viewing from the
bunks.
E. CocKPIT ENTERTAINMENT
The cockpit entertainment consists of a set of
speakers connected to the CD/stereo system
located above the MDP panels in the aft salon. The
speakers can be activated and controlled by the
remote stereo control in the salon.
F. BRIDGE ENTERTAINMENT
The bridge entertainment system consists of a CD/
stereo system located in a storage area on the
outboard port side of the control station. The
speakers can be activated and controlled by the
remote stereo control on the starboard side of the
control station.
G. DOCKSIDE TELEVISION HOOKUP
For television reception dockside, attach the
dockside television cable to the inlet located in the
starboard transom (See figure 7.10.1).
TO CONNECT CABLE TELEVISION:
1. Lift cover plate.
2. Screw the TV coax cable into the TV cable
connector (See figure 7.10.1).
3. Run the cable to the dockside receptacle and
screw coax cable into receptacle.
H. TV SIGNAL SELECTOR
The antenna/cable selector panel is located on the
aft wall of the salon above the port sofa. Turn the
selector to MAX GAIN for onboard TV antenna
4
TV SIGNAL SELECTOR
(Fic. 7.11.1) | Y / |
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
7.11
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
reception. Turn the selector to SHORE for dockside
cable reception.
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
9. AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER
The 450 EB is equipped with an automatic fire
extinguisher system located forward of the engines
on the bulkhead. In the event of a fire, the heat
sensitive automatic head will release the
extinguishant as a vapor, totally flooding the area in
fire-killing concentrations.
=
J
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER
(F16.7.12.1)
AUTOMATIC FIRE
EXTINGUISHER
f A
DIESEL AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER INDICATOR
(Fıc. 7.12.2)
J
WHEN ACTUATION OCCURS, IMMEDIATELY
SHUT DOWN ALL ENGINES, POWERED
VENTILATION, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND
EXTINGUISH ALL SMOKING MATERIALS. DO
NOT IMMEDIATELY OPEN THE ENGINE
COMPARTMENT!!! THIS FEEDS OXYGEN TO
THE FIRE AND FLASHBACK COULD OCCUR.
Allow the extinguishant to “soak” the compartment
for at least fifteen (15) minutes and for hot metals
or fuels to cool before cautiously inspecting for
cause of damage. Have portable extinguishers at
hand and ready. Do not breathe fumes or
vaporscaused by the fire.
The system indicator and switch module (ENGINE
SHUTDOWN AND OVERRIDE SYSTEM) located
at the control station is wired to the ignition and
turned ON when ignition is turned ON. The CHARGE
and DISCHARGE indicator lights, indicate to the
helmsman when the unit has discharged. Under
\. J
normal circumstances, when the ignition is ON the
CHARGE indicator light ia ON. If the unit discharges,
the CHARGE light will go OFF and the DISCHARGE
light will turn ON. The system incorporates an engine
shutdown switch with override system. When the
system discharges it will shut down the engines.
After the engine room has been inspected and it
has been determined safe and you are ready to
restart the engines, activate the OVERRIDE switch
on the ENGINE SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE
SYSTEM, then restart the engines.
A. MANUAL FIRE EXTINGUISING SYSTEM
Located at the control station, the manual fire
extinguisher system allows the operator to manually
activate the automatic extinguisher in the engine
room. Early detection and use of the manual
override system will reduce fire damage by
eliminating the time necessary for heat in the engine
room to rise to a temperature necessary to activate
the automatic fire extinguisher.
To OPERATE:
1. Pull pin securing the handle.
2. Pull red FIRE handle quickly and briskly.
SAFETY PIN
The safety pin, located at the neck of the extinguisher
bottle in the engine room is for shipping and transfer
of the bottle only. The pin MUST be removed in order
to manually operate the system.
This pin should be removed upon installation of the
7.12
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
f ‚A
MANUAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
(Fıc. 7.13.1)
Na J
| ENGINE ROOM FIRE EXTINGUISHER
(Fic. 7.13.2)
NOTE: THE MANUAL SYSTEM WILL NOT OPERATE
IF SAFETY PIN IS INSTALLED.
\. J
system. Ensure that this has been done. The
manual system will not function unless the
safety pin has been removed from the fire
extinguisher bottle.
f в
THE SAFETY PIN MUST BE REMOVED AFTER
CABLE S-HOOK & ATTACHMENT PIN ARE
INSTALLED. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL RESULT
IN INABILITY TO MANUALLY OPERATE SYSTEM. |
\.
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
B. HAND HELD EXTINGUISHERS
the American Boat and Yacht Council (ABYC)
recommends that you have three (3) Type B-l ABC
fire extinguishers on board, one each located at the
helm station and outside the engine compartment
and in the galley.
10. UTILITY Room
Access to the water heater, optional washer/dryer
combo, salon A/C compressor and storage can be
obtained by raising the electrically actuated hatch
located in the mid salon floor. The hatch is powered
by the accessory breaker on the Main DC
Distribution Panel.
f A
UTILITY Room
(F1G6.7.13.3)
7,
=q —
os
000 SN
ANS
/
Ва
|]
Ш
N J
11. Bow THRUSTER (OPTIONAL)
The bow thruster is electrically driven and gives
the operator more maneuverability of the bow. The
| Bow THRUSTER
(FIG. 7.13.4)
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
7.13
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
f Bow THRUSTER |
(Fra. 7.14.1)
(A) BOW THRUSTER MOTOR
MASTER STATEROOM FLOOR HATCH
(C) MASTER STATEROOM BUNK
bow thruster motor is located under the forward
hatch in the master stateroom. An oil reservoir bottle
for the bow thruster is located on the aft wall of the
bunk frame and can be accessed by lifting the bunk
mattress. Periodically check the oil reservoir and
top off if necessary.
The 24V BOW THRUSTER switch which supplies
power to the bow thruster is located on the control
station along with the joy stick with station enabled
indicator light (See figure 2.8.2).
The bow thruster motor is equipped with an internal
thermally activated breaker. The thermal breaker
protects the motor from overheating. When the
thermal breaker is activated the thruster motor will
not operate and must be allowed to cool down for
normal operation.
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
12. REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER
The galley refrigerator/freezer is supplied power
by the REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER breaker on the
120VAC main distribution panel. To operate
dockside, connect the shore power system, turn
the MAIN breaker(s) ON. Then turn the
REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER breaker on the AC
main distribution panel and the switch on the bottom
of the unit ON.
A. BRIDGE ICE MAKER
The bridge ice maker is located forward of the
control station. The STBD SYSTEMS breaker on
the 120VAC main distribution panel powers the unit.
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION
13. COFFEE MAKER
The drip coffee maker located in a cabinet above
the sink in the galley operates on the 120 volt
system. lt is powered by the GALLEY SYSTEMS
breaker on the 120VAC main distribution panel
which must be ÓN to operate the coffee maker.
To keep the coffee maker operating efficiently, the
mineral deposits left by water must be flushed out
using the cleaning method described in the
instruction booklet.
Tun off coffee maker before closing cabinet
doors. Failure to do so may result in damage to
| the coffee maker or cabinet.
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
14. STOVE & MICROWAVE
A. ELECTRIC STOVE
The STOVE breaker on the 240VAC main
distribution panel located in the aft port of the salon
supplies power to the stove and must be ON to
operate the stove.
The stove has two (2) burners with control knobs
to provide a variation of heat.
7.14
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
A stove cover is provided to cover the burners when
not in use. A power safety switch is installed on
the cover recess. When the stove cover is installed
it depresses the switch turning power OFF to the
stove control knobs. When using the stove the stove
cover can be stored in the shelf at the top of the
cabinet directly below the stove.
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
B. MICROWAVE/CONVECTION OVEN
The microwave/convection oven is located in the
cabinet above the refrigerator/freezer. The 120VAC
MICROWAVE breaker on the AC main distribution
panel supplies power to the microwave and must
be ON to operate the unit.
NOTE: Turn on the galley power ventilation system
when operating the convection oven.
REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
15. POWER VENTILATION SYSTEM
The power ventilation system removes stagnant &
foul air from the master stateroom head, galley and
guest head by means of exhaust fans. They are
powered by the POWER VENTS breaker on the
DC main distribution panel in the salon and
individually turned on and off by the power vent
switch in the heads and the galley.
16. CENTRAL VACUUM (OPTIONAL)
The central vacuum unit is located under the salon
companionway steps. The CABIN MAIN breaker
must be ON to operate the system.
The 24 foot hose is stored under the guest
stateroom entertainment center. The hose connects
to the central vacuum through the hose inlet which
Is located on the step riser between the galley and
salon.
CENTRAL VACUUM SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
(F16.7.15.1)
(A VACUUM CLEANER
GALLEY FLOOR HATCH
Ne J
The built in switch on the hose ( Y
inlet fittings activate the vacuum
when the hose is inserted. The
disposable bag is located under
the removable panel on the top
of the vacuum unit.
17. WASHER & DRYER (OPTIONAL)
The optional washer/dryer is a front loading washing
and drying combination unit located in the utility
room. The unit can be accessed raising the
electrically actuated hatch in the center floor of the
salon. The unit operates on the 120VAC WASHER/
DRYER breaker on the AC main distribution panel.
The washer/dryer is connected to hot and cold water
shutoff valves on the starboard side of the utility
room. The supply valves should be on only when
the unit is being used.
f A
WASHER/DRYER (OPTIONAL)
(Fic. 7.15.2)
A
Ts
200
€ Oy
(A) WASHER/DRYER / — @
STARBOARD ACCESS
| © ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED HATCH
„
REFER TO OWNER’'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
7.15
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
18. CONVERTABLE SALON SOFA
The starboard sofa in the salon can be converted
into bedding to accomodate additional overnight
guests. By using the ottoman stored in the salon
table as a support base, place the formed bases
and cushions found under the guest bunk onto the
support ridge located around the sofa pedestal.
19, Live BAITWELL (OPTIONAL)
The optional live baitwell is located on the top port
of the transom. The baitwell is powered by a switch
located on the inside port of the transom storage
locker. The pump, strainer and seacock for the
baitwell are located under the generator in the bilge.
The accessory switch on the 120VAC main
distribution panel supplies power to the baitwell
switch.
f в
BAITWELL SWITCH ® 3
(FIG. 7.16.1) BAITWELL PUMP
BAITWELL PUMP
(Fic. 7.16.2)
© BAITWELL SEACOCK
BAITWELL STRAINER (© GENERATOR FLOORING
(A BAITWELL PUMP
20. HORN
The horn, located in the bow chain locker is
protected by a breaker on the control station breaker
panel which can be accessed through the door
underneath the port side of the helm. The
compressor bottle for the horn is located on the aft
side of the chain locker bulkhead in the gunwale.
To activate the horn, depress the HORN switch on
the control station switch panel.
HORN SWITCH
(Fra. 7.16.3)
\. J
21. SHORE POWER
The 75 50amp/240V/60 cycle shore power cord with
remote retreival switch is located in the starboard
side of the transom and can be accessed by lifting
the transom hatch. For operation see Section 6-
Electrical System, page 6-12.
22. CANVAS
It is recommended that you read Section 1e Safety,
pages 1.2 thru 1.4 and understand the effects of
exhaust emissions.
A. CARE & MAINTENANCE
Care and maintenance instructions have been
provided by the canvas manufacturer for the canvas
used on your Sea Ray®. The information can be
found in the Owner's Manual Packet.
7.16
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
By following the provided instructions, your canvas
set will give you protection from the elements and
comfort that you expect. Most of all, the instructions
provide you with installation and removal procedures
that will simplify the task.
Components of your canvas set consist of Zipper
tracks and snaps. These components can be found
in the parts manual located in the Owner's Manual
Packet.
B. STORAGE:
Do not fold or store any of the canvas set pieces
while wet. All canvas should be rolled or folded
when dry and stored in a clean, dry place.
e For clear vinyl pieces, rolling or laying down flat
are the recommended methods for storage.
The clear vinyl should never be folded or creased
as cracking will result. To protect the clear vinyl
from rubbing against itself while rolled or stored
flat, place a piece of very soft, nonabrasive cloth
between the pieces, or rolled up in it. If the
surface of your clear vinyl becomes scratched,
the canvas manufacturer has provided a
canvas care sheet in your Owner's Manual
Packet.
C. INSTALLATION TIPS:
* Thezippers attached on the hardtop and cockpit
overhead are mounted on a zipper track. Once
Installed, do not remove these zippers or zipper
tracks.
When attaching any of the pieces of the canvas
set, attach the top edges first and zip the zippers
only partially. This helps to hold the piece in
place and relieves tension, helping the other
sides to Zip or snap easier. After all of the sides
of the piece are secure, finish zipping the top
of each piece. This will ensure a tight fit.
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
7.17
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
23. FLOOR PLAN
INTERIOR
(Fic. 7.18.1) a O
(A) MASTER STATEROOM
MASTER STATEROOM A/C UNIT
(С) MASTER STATEROOM TV/VCR COMBO
(D) MASTER STATEROOM HANGING CLOSET
(E) GUEST SHOWER
(F) GUEST HEAD
с (G) GUEST VANITY
() N (H) GUEST STATEROOM TV/VCR COMBO
(1) GUEST STATEROOM BUNK
() (@) MASTER STATEROOM SHOWER
(K) MASTER STATEROOM HEAD
© MASTER STATEROOM VANITY
(M) MASTER STATEROOM HANGING CLOSET
N) GUEST STATEROOM SKYLIGHT
©) BOTTLE RACK
@ STARBOARD SALON SOFA & STORAGE
ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED UTILITY
ROOM HATCH
(R) SALON ENTERTAINMENT CENTER
(S) AC & DC MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANELS
(T) PORT SALON SOFA & STORAGE
(U) GALLEY SINK
(v) COFFEE MAKER
(W) MICROWAVE/CONVECTION OVEN
(%) REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER
Na J
7.18 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
FLOOR PLAN
GENERAL DECK LAYOUT
(F16.7.19.1)
(A) ANCHOR CHUTE
WINDLASS
(©) WINDLASS FOOT SWITCHES
(©) BOW STORAGE LOCKER
(Е) DECK HATCH
(F) FORWARD BRIDGE STEPS
(G) SPOTLIGHT
(1) BRIDGE ICE MAKER
(1) BRIDGE COMPANION SEATING
(J) CAPTAIN'S CHAIR
(K) AFT BRIDGE SEATING
(1) SPOILER
(M) WASTE PUMPOUT
(N) STARBOARD TRANSOM DOOR
(©) TRANSOM STORAGE (FISH COOLER)
(P) STARBOARD FUEL FILL
(Q SWIM PLATFORM
(R) SWIM LADDER
(S) TRANSOM STORAGE (ACCESS TO
CABLEMASTER & REMOTE, TV/PHONE
HOOKUP, DOCKSIDE WATER INLET, COCKPIT
WASHDOWN AND BAITWELL SWITCH)
(T) PORT FUEL FILL
(U) LIVE BAITWELL
(V) PORT TRANSOM DOOR
(w AFT BRIDGE STEPS (LIFT FOR ACCESS TO DC
BREAKER PANEL, GENERATOR GAUGES AND
FUEL CROSSOVER BOARD)
(X) FRESH WATER FILL
(Y) CONTROL STATION
(Z) BRIDGE WET BAR
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
7.19
SECTION 7 * ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
THISPAGELEFTINTENTIONALLY BLANK
7.20 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
Routine inspection, service and maintenance of your
boat's systems are vital to assure your safety, as
well as for prolonging the life of your boat. You should
develop regular routines for inspecting your boat.
The chart below summarizes inspection, service and
maintenance activities. This section also contains
descriptions of some convenient methods for
evaluating the condition of some of your boat's
systems.
The interval between necessary service or
maintenance is highly variable, depending on the
environment your boat is in, and on the severity of
operating conditions. For example, corrosion of parts
on boats operated in salt water proceeds much
faster than the corrosion of parts on a boat operated
in fresh water. The intervals listed below are
recommended maximums, and you must reduce the
time between inspections if your observations
indicate the need.
1. SUMMARY GUIDE For INSPECTION, SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
Battery Check water level Owners Manual p. 6.1 ° °
Bilge Area Clean and check Owner's Manual p. 9.2
Bilge Blowers Hose connections tight Owners Manual p. 4.2 °
Bilge Pump Float switch operates freely | Owner's Manual p. 4.1
Canvas Clean Owners Manual p. 9.3 As Needed
Controls
Steering Check for proper operation To be done by Sea Ray dealer every six months
Power steering oil level Engine Manual °
Throttle Lubricate. Include all shift Engine Manual . .
linkage and pivot points
Electrical
Connections Check for looseness To be done by Sea Ray dealer annually
GFCI (120V) Outlet
Check for operation
Owners Manual p. 6.12
Engine
Alarm Check Engine Manual °
Cooling System Check for leaks Engine Manual °
Connections with engine running
Crankcase Clean Engine Manual ° °
ventilating system
Drive belts Check Engine Manual °
Exhaust System Check for leaks Engine Manual ° ° °
Flame Arrestor Clean Engine Manual ° °
Fuel Filter Replace Engine Manual °
Mounts (Fasteners) | Tighten Engine Manual °
Oil and Filter Replace Engine Manual °
Oil Level Check Engine Manual °
Fuel System
Connections & Lines |Check for leaks Engine Manual ° ° °
Tanks Check for leaks Owners Manual, Section 5 ° ° °
Water Separating Replace Engine Manual °
Fuel Filter
*Use in salt water or other severe operating conditions requires shorter maintenance/service intervals
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
8.1
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
SUMMARY GUIDE FOR INSPECTION, SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
Propeller
Seaworthiness
drain
Hull damage
Topside & Supplies
Transmission
Oil Strainer Screen
Trim Tabs
Zincs
Transom
Trim Tabs
Inspect for
Installed and
Check for loose, damaged
or
Check for loose, damaged
or missing parts
Clean
Check and replace as
needed
Check fluid level
Always after object
Always after striking object
Owners Manual p. 8.5
To be done Sea dealer
Owner's Manual р. 6.13 Every 25 hours of operation
Trim Tab Manual Every 25 hours of operation
*Use in salt water or other severe operating conditions requires shorter maintenance/service intervals
8.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
2. USEFUL SERVICE INFORMATION
OWNER
HOME PORT
BOAT NAME
REGISTRATION NUMBER STATE
HULL SERIAL NUMBER
WARRANTY REGISTRATION DATE
ENGINE MAKE 8: MODEL
SERIAL NUMBER PORT STARBOARD
GEAR MAKE 8 REDUCTION RATIO
SERIAL NUMBER PORT STARBOARD
PROPELLER SIZE PORT STARBOARD
PART NUMBER PORT STARBOARD
SHAFT SIZE (DIAMETER X LENGTH) MATERIAL
FUEL CAPACITY PORT TANK STARBOARD
WATER CAPACITY
KEY NUMBER, IGNITION DOOR
SELLING DEALER
CITY & STATE
LENGTH BEAM DRAFT
VERTICAL CLEARANCE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
GENERATOR SERIAL # MODEL # KILOWATTS
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
8.3
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
3. INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL
A. BILGE AREA
Many of your boat's systems have critical features
located in the bilge area. Athorough and organized
inspection of the bilge area will address many of
these critical features. For example, engine oil leaks
and fuel system leaks will show themselves as
contamination on the surface of the liquid that
remains in the bilge. When you see such
contamination, you should look for its source.
Once or twice a year, pump the bilge areas dry and
remove all loose dirt. Be sure that all the limber holes
are open. Limber holes are the openings in the
stringers that allow water to flow from the outboard
areas of the bilge to the bilge sump.
Check the bilge pump float switch by moving it
manually. (Figures 4.1.1 thru 4.1.3) The bilge pump
should start when the float switch is raised and
should stop when lowered. If it does not, first try
reseting the bilge pump breakers, if the pump will
still not run replace the float switch before using
your boat. The float switch should also move freely
without sticking, if it does not, have it serviced or
replaced before boating.
DO NOT USE FLAMMABLE SOLVENTS to clean any
part of the bilge.
Fumes can accumulate and can be the source of an
explosion.
1. Оп.
If there is oil contamination, look for leaks in engine
oil lines and engine gaskets. If parts of the bilge
have been stained by oil, the stain can be removed
using a bilge cleaner available from your dealer or
a marine store.
2. ENGINE
Engine failure or malfunction, when away from
shore, can be dangerous. Make certain you do the
following each time you use the boat:
* Wipe off the engine to remove accumulated
dust, grease and oil.
* Check all exposed nuts, bolts and screws for
tightness.
e Inspect the belts for wear. If they do not require
replacement, check and adjust the belt tension
according to the engine manufacturer's
recommendation.
* Inspect engine wiring, and clean and tighten the
terminals on the engine electrical system.
e (Clean and lubricate the battery cables.
* Add distilled water to the battery cells as
needed.
Refer to your Engine Operator's Manual for
additional engine maintenance requirements.
3. FUEL SYSTEM
Inspect the entire fuel system for evidence of
leakage, including the fuel tank fill lines and
vents. Any stain around a joint could be an
indication of a leak.
Test all fittings with a wrench to be sure they
are not loose, but do not forcefully overtighten
the fittings.
* Clean fuel filters and vent screens.
Work on electrical wiring can create shock hazards
or sparks.
Always shut off battery switch, breakers and/or pull
fuses before checking electrical wiring or connectors.
N J
8.4
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
4. WIRING SYSTEM
Check all wiring for proper support.
Check all wiring insulation for signs of fraying
or chafing.
e (Check all terminals for corrosion - corroded
terminals and connectors should be replaced
or thoroughly cleaned.
Tighten all terminals securely and spray them
with light marine preservative oil.
5. FITTINGS, HOSES AND CLAMPS
Inspect the entire bilge area for evidence of
damage or deterioration. Evidence of
deterioration will first appear around hull fittings,
hoses and clamps.
e Straighten kinked hoses.
Replace any hose that does not feel pliable.
* Check all hose clamps for tightness and
corrosion. Corroded clamps must be replaced.
e (Check the nuts, bolts and screws that retain
equipment, hoses, etc. in the bilge for tightness
and corrosion. Corroded fasteners must be
replaced.
B. TOPSIDE AND SUPPLIES
Once a year, you should undertake a thorough
review of the topside equipment, as well as of the
critical safety supplies on your boat.
* Check cleats, rings, rails, etc. for loose or
corroded fasteners, breaks, sharp edges or
other conditions that could lead to malfunction
or unsafe use. Repair or replace as necessary.
e Inspect PFDs (life jackets) for tears and
deterioration.
* Make certain you have enough PFDs on board
for the maximum number of persons you can
carry.
e Check your first aid kit, making certain it is
complete and that the items in it have not passed
an expiration date.
Check the signaling equipment and emergency
flares. Make sure all items are within their
expiration dates.
* Inspect the anchor, mooring and towing lines.
Repair or replace as required.
e Check fire extinguishers for full charge.
4. WINTERIZATION CHECKLIST FOR
BoATs STORED ON LAND
A. BOAT STORAGE
e Store boat in a bow high attitude.
e Remove hull drain plug.
e Pour one (1) pint (half-liter) of 50% water/
antifreeze mixture in each bilge pump sump..
B. ENGINES
Flush engines with fresh water.
* Remove engine drain plugs.
REFER TO YOUR ENGINE OPERATOR'S MANUAL
FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON PREPARING
THE ENGINES FOR STORAGE AND
WINTERIZATION.
C. BATTERY(IES)
e Remove from boat. Remove the negative (-)
cable first, then the positive (+) cable.
* Remove grease and dirt from top surface.
(Grease terminal bolts.
e Store on wooden pallet or thick plastic in a cool
dry place. Do not store on concrete.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
8.5
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
Keep under a trickle charge.
When placing battery back into service, remove
excess grease from terminals, recharge as
necessary and reinstall in boat.
D. HEAD SYSTEM
e Flush entire system thoroughly with fresh water.
Pump out holding tank.
* Remove water line from inlet fitting located
on back bottom half of water valve on head.
Flush one gallon (four liters) antifreeze mixed
with one gallon (four liters) of water through toilet
and let vacuum pump run for one or two
minutes.
e Shut WATER SYSTEM breaker OFF.
Pump out holding tank.
E. WATER SYSTEM
* Turn ÓN the WATER SYSTEM switch.
Open water faucet, let system drain completely.
e Turn OFF the WATER SYSTEM switch.
* Water must be removed from the water lines
with air pressure or flushed with a nontoxic
antifreeze.
Using pressurized air to remove water from water
lines:
* You must have an air compressor with air hose
and air nozzle.
* Remove water hoses from water pump.
e Alternate opening one faucet at a time to make
sure water is removed from each line.
Blow air through the water lines removed from
the water pump.
NOTE: When blowing air be careful not to blow air
with all faucets closed. System could be damaged
by overpressurization and create water leaks.
e (Cover hose ends with screen or broad weave
cloth and tape in place to keep out dirt and bugs.
USING NONTOXIC WINTERIZING ANTIFREEZE:
Purchase a nontoxic winterizing antifreeze for
fresh water systems from a marine or RV supply
retailer.
With all water pumped out of the system add
nontoxic antifreeze to the water tank. Pour in
enough to be pumped to all faucets and
showers.
* Close all faucets and turn on water system.
* (Open one faucet at a time. Close faucet when
nontoxic antifreeze comes out of faucet.
e Afterall faucets and showers have been treated,
open all faucets and pump out remaining
nontoxic antifreeze.
WATER HEATER WINTERIZATION
e Refer to your water heater Owner's Manual for
detailed information on preparing water heater
for storage and winterization.
F. FUEL SYSTEMS
(GASOLINE:
e Fill fuel tank with gasoline and the
recommended amount of stabilizer and
conditioner such as “Stabil®”.
Run engine(s) for ten minutes to ensure that all
gasoline in the carburetor and fuel lines are
treated.
8.6
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
DIESEL
* Fill fuel tank with diesel and recommended
amount of biocide, “Biobor”, which prevents
bacteria and fungi from contaminating diesel fuel
that contains some water.
* Diesel fuel should also get a petroleum distillate
additive, such as “Stabil® or Racor? RX100”.
This will absorb water in the fuel and prevent
freezing problems.
e Run engine(s) for ten minutes to ensure that all
diesel fuel in injectors and fuel lines is treated.
DETAILED WINTERIZING, OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION
ARE PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURER AND CAN BE FOUND IN THE
OWNER’S PACKET.
Do not overfill. Filling a tank until the fuel flows
from vents is dangerous. Allow room for expansion.
5. FITTING OUT AFTER STORAGE
A. FUEL SYSTEM
Check the entire fuel system for loose connections,
worn hoses, leaks, etc. and repair. This is a primary
safety precaution.
Check fuel lines for damage and make sure that
they do not come in contact with any moving parts.
B. BATTERY (IES)
Before installing the batteries, clean the terminal
posts with a wire brush or steel wool and then attach
the cables. After the cable clamps are tightened,
smear the post and clamps with vaseline or grease
to exclude air and acid. Do not apply grease before
attaching and tightening the terminal clamps.
Examine all wiring.
C. MISCELLANEOUS
e Check all thru-hull fittings for unobstructed
water passage. Be alert for any deteriorated
hoses and/or fittings below the water line which
might fail in service and admit water.
e Test the navigation lights.
e Check all wiring for loose connections.
e Check all switches and equipment for proper
operation.
e Check bilge blowers for proper operation.
Turn ON blowers and place hand over hull
blower vent to make sure air is coming from
vent.
* Anchor lines and gear should be inspected
and replaced if necessary.
* Make sure the hull drain plug is in place and
tight.
e (Clean bilge thoroughly if it was not done at
lay-up.
* Check all engine fluid levels.
Check fuel lines for damage and/or leaks. Make
sure that they do not come into contact with
moving parts.
6. SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS
Be conscious of the security of your boat.
Always remove the keys from the ignition, lock
hatches, lock the cabin door, remove and stow
any removable electronic gear (fishfinders,
GPS, etc.) and personal gear (fishing poles,
etc.) normally left aboard your boat.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
8.7
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
7. SEACOCK LUBRICATION
* With boat out of water, remove the hose from
top of the seacock.
Put seacock handle in closed position.
Add a few drops of lubricating oil inside.
* Work handle back and forth a few times. Add
oil as needed.
* Replace hose and tighten clamp.
Add afew drops of oil to the handle pivot point.
N
| SEACOCK
(FIG. 8.8.1)
SEACOCK
HANDLE
HOSE
HOSE CLAMPS
SEACOCK BODY
dSO 19
PIVOT POINT
8. ENGINE OIL CHANGE SYSTEM
Follow the intervals and oil change instructions
provided by the engine manufacturer.
Follow the oil exchange instructions found in Section
4 - Bilge and Underwater Equipment, page 4.4.
REFER TO THE ENGINE OWNER'S MANUAL
FOR INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY
INFORMATION.
8.8
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
9. Quick REFERENCE CHECKLIST
As the owner/operator of a Sea Ray® Sport Boat, you are responsible for the safe operation your boat and the safety
of your passengers. Always be sure that required documents, navigational equipment and Coast Guard required
safety equipment is aboard and in proper working order.
A. BOARDING THE BOAT*
GENERAL
Weather ConditioONS eK Is it going to be safe to go out
2. Transom Drain PIUQ eK Installed
3. PFDs and all other Coast Guard
required safety equipment ……..….…..…..…….…..…….………………… Available for all children and adults
4. |gnition keys …..…....…...…….......ccsrcesserenerenserense cn nere0 se Available
5. TOO = To ) QU Stocked with a variety of appropriate tools
BOAT SYSTEMS
1. Bilge Pumps .................. 0222200000 KR K EEK K KERN Working. Discharge any appreciable amounts of
water overboard
2. BIOWErS ..…..................ncrcecssrres cernes esrr es err era creer Working. “Sniff” the bilge/engine compartment for
fuel odor
3. Navigation Lights …...….....….....……...rrerecssecreneeeccnnere Working. Have spare bulbs (and if applicable fuses)
aboard
4. Radio/Electronics ……....…….......…...rrrecesessencensere Working
5. HOM cen Working
6. THM TADS cco ere Full range of motion. No excessive play or binding
7. Fresh Water Tank... Filled and sanitized
8. Head System Holding Tank... Empty
9. SeacCocks...................eeeerecercrecoeneeceereeceneseteneae eee Generator Open (handle parallel to hose),
Head System Holding Tank Closed (handle
perpendicular to hose)
ENGINE
1. Batteries ....ccooovviiii K RER KR RRKKEEEHG Fully charged (Check water cell levels)
2. Fuel Tank ee K RER KR RK ER REKEN Filled with recommended fuel
3. Fuel System .................eeeeecrccerrcececerrreeneeeeeeeeeee. Check for leaks
4. Fuel Filters ......cooooiiii DA Check that filters are clean and tight
5. Diesel Racor Fuel Filters .......................—..__—— Check that filters are clean, tight and free of water
6. Engine Coolant Drain Plugs Secured
7. Steering Fluid …..............……ccrrrreececrerra cc srs rence Full
8. Throttle á Gearshift Controls Test..................———... Full range of motion
*Note: If trailering boat, many of these items should be checked before leaving the house.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 8.9
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
Quick REFERENCE CHECKLIST (CONT’D)
B. PREPARING TO DEPART AND AFTER LAUNCHING
GENERAL
1. Bilge/Engine Compartment .............cccceei vive. “Sniff” the bilge/engine compartment for fuel odor.
Run the bilge blowers for at least four (4) minutes.
2. Shore Power Cable esse Disconnected from dockside power inlet
3. Lines, Fenders and AnChOF ee Ready for use
4. Passengers/Crew .……....….....…...…crrerccrera ces cac ssaancn ee Instructed in duties for getting underway and fitted for a
correct size PFD
ENGINE
1. Battery Switches ........ccooiiiiiiii In the ON position
2. Fuel Valves (Diesel Only) ..........................=ee... Opens
3. Engine Alarm... erre Test. Should sound after a few seconds
4. Gear Shift 8% Throttle Controls .....................—....... In NEUTRAL and IDLE positions
STARTING THE ENGINE*
1. Gearshift á Throttle Controls.......................———.—.——.—.. Shift in NEUTRAL (Refer to your Engine Owner's
Manual for startup procedures for your specific
engine)
2. |gnition ooo ERKREKRERKRRKRERKRKEERKRKEEKHG Turn master ignition keys on DC distribution panel to
the ON position. Depress ignition switch on the helm
switch panel to START position until engine starts, then
release to RUN position (light on).
IMPORTANT: Do not continue to operate starter for more than 10 seconds without
pausing to allow starter motor to cool off for 2 minutes. This also will allow the battery
to recover between starting attempts.”
Do not run the engine or generator in an enclosed
area, such as a closed boat house, as there is
the possibility of buildup and inhaling of carbon
monoxide.
*If engine fails to start, refer to the Engine Owner's Manual for further troubleshooting procedures
8.10 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
Quick REFERENCE CHECKLIST (CONT’D)
C. WHILE UNDERWAY
GENERAL
1. Passengers/CreWw ....................—rreeíreeerrcenrrrer DD Safely seated with PFD’s on or immediately accessible
2. Lines, Fenders and Anchor... Stowed
BOAT SYSTEMS
1. Trim Tabs coe, Bring boat to “On Plane”. Adjust as neccessary
2. Navigation Lights ........ccoooiiii en, On at night or in reduced visibility
ENGINE
1. Tachometers ....................... K AA Engines operating in safe RPM range
2. Engine Gauges.................—..e..eieeeeenerre KR Continually monitor
3. Engine Operation .......................eeeeeeie eee, Check idle and shift. Listen for abnormal noises and
visually check the engine compartment while
underway
D. RETURNING TO PORT
GENERAL
1. Passengers/Crew ....................eeeeeeieereenerree DA Instructed in duties for line handling
2. Lines and Fenders..................._.eee.eeeeerrereceree A. Ready for use
BOAT SYSTEMS
1. Navigation Lights .......ccc.ooiii A Turned OFF when secured
2. Anchor Light …....…......…....…..srereesesere ses r ere s een ON if necessary
3. Bilge/Engine Compartment …….......….….....………...……………. “Sniff” the bilge/engine compartment for fuel odor.
Run the bilge blowers if necessary. Check for water
in bilge. Run bilge pumps if necessary
ENGINE
1. Gearshift & Throttle Controls.…..…..…….....…….…..….……………. Bring to NEUTRAL and IDLE positions
2. Tachometers ..……..….......…...…...….rcsrrccecereresee seen secure Idle the engines for five (5) minutes to cool down
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 8.11
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
Quick REFERENCE CHECKLIST (CONT’D)
3. Ignition ee, Depress ENGINE STOP switches on the helm switch
panel when engines are cooled down.
4. Engine Operation .........................eeeieieei eee Check idle and shift. Listen for abnormal noises
E. SECURING THE BOAT
GENERAL
1. Shore Power Cable as re Connected to dockside power inlet
2. Lines and Fenders.…...…..…..…..……...…...…..……rresecseenseences Fenders in place, lines tied securely to dock
BOAT SYSTEMS
US CE Closed (handle perpendicular to hose)
2. Helm Switch Panel es re All switches in the OFF position
3. Gearshift á Throttle Controls ...................—._._... In the NEUTRAL and IDLE positions
ENGINE
1. Ignition ….…....….......……ecrercrerearere ser e rene racer ne nee Switched in the OFF position (lights off) and master
ignition keys removed from DC distribution panel
2. Battery Switches ee EEE In the OFF position
1. Fuel Valves (Diesel Only) ee Closed (handle perpendicular to hose)
F. IF THE ENGINE DOES NOT START
No STARTER MOTOR RESPONSE
1. Check gearshift/throttle control levers in the NEUTRAL positions
Check battery condition for sufficient charge
Check battery cable connections tight and free from corrosion
Check battery switches in the ON position
Check starter motor and solenoid connections
о со К © №
Check ignition switch connections
STARTER MOTOR RESPONDS, BUT NO IGNITION
1. Check that fuel tanks are not empty
2. Check fuel filters and filter/water separators clean
3. Check electrical connections on engine wiring harness and ignition wiring
8.12 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
Quick REFERENCE CHECKLIST (CONT’D)
G. OPERATING THE GENERATOR
STARTING THE GENERATOR
1. Generator SeacoCk..................e.eeíieeeeeerceneereee ee KEG Open
2. Bilge BIOWEIS ......oviiiii ass rennes rennes Run for at least 4 minutes and any time the generator is running
3. Depress PREHEAT/ON .......cccoooiiiiiiii eee, Preheat time should not exceed 30 seconds
4. Depress START/RUN Switch ...............eeeeeeeeeeeeeeree_s Depress until generator starts
5. When the Generator Starts... Release the START switch only continue holding PREHEAT/
ON for a few seconds)
6. Load The Generator ................... ee... eee, Turn ÓN the generator main breaker on the Main
Distribution Panel. Turn AC breakers ON
STOPPING THE GENERATOR
1. Breakers o.oo, Turn AC breakers OFF. Turn OFF the generator main breaker
on the Main Distribution Panel
2. GeneratOf eK RER REERKRR RER KR EERK RR ER KRK EEE Let it run a few minutes to cool down
3. STOP SWItCh cco, Depress to stop the generator set
Do not run the generator or engines in an
enclosed area, such as a closed boat house, as
there is the possibility of buildup and inhaling of
carbon monoxide.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
10. AFTER MARKET EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST
Any safety or operational equipment added to your boat after delivery should be checked for seaworthyness
and proper working condition. Use the area below to list any equipment and the proper operating condition
of that equipment before getting underway.
Equipment Proper Operating Condition
8.14 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
11. MAINTENANCE LoG
Follow the recommended maintenance listed on pages 1 á 2 of this section and keep a record of this and
ALL maintenance performed on your boat.
Date Maintenance Description Engine Hours
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge) 8.15
SECTION 8 * REQUIRED INSPECTION, SERVICE AND
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE LOG (Cont’p)
Date Maintenance Description Engine Hours
8.16 450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 9 * CARE & REFINISHING
1. MAINTENANCE AND
RECONDITIONING
Your new boat has been designed to provide you
with years of enjoyment and satisfaction. In order
to maintain the factory new appearance of your boat,
we recommend the use of BM™ Marine's one step
Maintenance and Reconditioning Products designed
specifically for pleasure boats. Following proper
fiberglass maintenance guidelines will help maintain
your boat's performance, value, and enjoyment.
2. FIBERGLASS & GELCOAT
The fiberglass hull, deck and some interior
parts consist of the molded shell and exterior
gelcoat. The gelcoat is the outer surface, often
colored, that presents the shiny smooth
appearance which is associated with fiberglass
products. In some areas, this gelcoat surface
Is painted or taped for styling purpose.
Gelcoat surfaces are slippery when wet. Use extreme
care when walking on wet gelcoat.
Always wear non-slip foot gear while washing and
waxing boat.
Care should be utilized in waxing commonly walked
upon areas of the boat to ensure that they are not
dangerously slippery.
NN J
Wash the fiberglass regularly with clean, fresh
water. Wax gelcoated surfaces to maintain the
luster. In northern climates, a semiannual
waxing may suffice for the season. In southern
climates, a quarterly application of wax will be
required for adequate protection.
REFER TO 3M ONE STEP MAINTENANCE AND
RECONDITIONING PRODUCTS PAMPHLET IN YOUR
OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR INSTRUCTIONS
AND WARRANTY INFORMATION
3. STAINS & SCRATCHES
Gelcoat and painted surfaces are very resistant
to deep stains. Common surface stains can be
removed with diluted household detergents,
provided these detergents do not contain
ammonia or chlorine. Porcelain-cleaning
powders are too abrasive and often contain
chlorine and ammonia, either of which would
permanently discolor the gelcoat and paint.
Alcohol or kerosene can be used for difficult
stains but should be washed away promptly
with a mild detergent and water. Never use
acetone or any ketone solvents.
Minor scratches and deeper stains which do
not penetrate the gelcoat may be removed by
light sanding and buffing.
4. SPECIAL CARE FOR BOATS THAT ARE
MOORED
If permanently moored in salt water or fresh
water, your boat will collect marine growth on
its bottom. This will detract from the boat’s
beauty and greatly affect its performance.
There are two methods of preventing this:
Periodically haul the boat out of the water
and scrub the bottom with a bristle brush
and a solution of soap and water.
* Paint the hull below the waterline with a
good grade of antifouling paint. DO NOT
paint the engine drive surfaces.
NOTE: There are EPA regulations regarding
bottom paint application. Consult your Sea
Ray® dealer for proper application methods.
S. CARE FOR BOTTOM PAINT
From time to time a slight algae or slime forms
on all vessels. The bottom painted portion of
the hull can be wiped off with a coarse turkish
towel or a piece of old rug while the boat is in
the water. Do not use a stiff or abrasive material
to clean the bottom paint.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
9.1
SECTION 9 * CARE & REFINISHING
The bottom paint should be inspected annually. If
it needs repainting consult your Sea Ray® dealer.
6. BILGE/ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Pump the bilges dry and remove all loose dirt.
Be sure that all limber holes are open. If there
is oil in the bilge and the source is not known,
look for leaks in engine oil lines or engine
gaskets. Qil stains can be removed by using a
bilge cleaner available from your dealer or a
marina. DO NOT use flammable solvents.
2. Check all wiring to be sure it is properly
supported, that its insulation is intact, and that
there are no loose or corroded terminals. If there
are corroded terminals, they should be replaced
or thoroughly cleaned. Tighten all terminals
securely and spray them with light marine
preservative oil.
3. Inspect the entire fuel system (including fill lines
and vents) for any evidence of leakage. Any
stains around joints could indicate a leak. Try a
wrench on all fittings to be sure they are not
loose, but do not over tighten them. Clean fuel
filters and vent screens.
4. Inspect the entire bottom for evidence of
seepage, damage or deterioration, paying
particular attention to hull fittings, hoses and
clamps. Straighten kinked hoses and replace
any that do not feel pliable. Tighten loose hose
clamps and replace those that are corroded.
Tighten any loose nuts, bolts or screws.
5. Refer to your engine operator's manual for
engine maintenance details. Wipe off engine
to remove accumulated dust and grease. If a
solvent is used, make sure it is nonflammable.
Go over the entire engine and tighten nuts,
bolts, and screws. Inspect the wiring on the
engine and clean and tighten the terminals.
Inspect the belts and tighten them if needed.
Clean and lubricate the battery terminals; fill
the battery cells with distilled water as needed.
A. KEEP BILGE AREA DRY
Water may accumulate in the engine room where it
is not able to drain to the bilge pump. Check all areas
of the engine room for accumulated water and dry
thoroughly. Water left standing may penetrate
through the gelcoated surfaces and wick into the
fiberglass affecting the life of the product.
7. TOPSIDE AREAS
1. Check grab rails for loose screws, breaks, sharp
edges, etc., that might be hazardous in rough
weather. Inventory and inspect life jackets for
tears and deterioration. Check your first aid kit
to make sure itis complete. Check the signaling
equipment. Inspect anchor, mooring and towing
lines and repair or replace as required. DO NOT
stow wet lines or they may mildew and rot.
2. Stainless steel and alloy fittings should be
cleaned with soap and water or household glass
cleaner. Remove rust spots as soon as possible
with a brass, silver or chrome cleaner.
Irreversible pitting will develop under rust that
remains for any period of time. Never use an
abrasive like sandpaper or steel wool on
stainless. These may actually cause rust. To
help protect the stainless, we recommend the
use of a good car wax.
3. When instruments are exposed to a saltwater
environment, salt crystals may form on the
bezel and the plastic covers. These salt crystals
should be removed with a soft, damp cloth;
never use abrasives or rough, dirty cloths to
wipe plastic parts. Mild household detergents
or plastic cleaners can be used to keep the
instruments bright and clean.
REFER TO THE OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
8. AcrYLIC PLASTIC SHEETING
(PLASTIC GLASS)
Never use a dry cloth or duster or glass cleaning
solutions on acrylic.
To clean acrylic, first flood it with water to wash off
as much dirt as possible. Next, use your bare hand,
with plenty of water, to feel and dislodge any caked
dirt or mud. A soft, grit-free cloth may then be used
9.2
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
SECTION 9 * CARE & REFINISHING
with a nonabrasive soap or detergent. A soft sponge,
kept clean for this purpose, is excellent. Blot dry
with a clean damp chamois.
Grease and oil may be removed from acrylic with
kerosene, hexane, white (not aviation or ethyl)
gasoline or aliphatic naphtha (no aromatic content).
Do not use solvents such as acetone, silicone
spray, benzine, carbon tetrachloride, fire
extinguisher fluid, dry cleaning fluid or lacquer
thinner on acrylic, since they attack the surface.
Remove fine scratches with fine automotive acrylic
rubbing and polishing compounds.
9. UPHOLSTERIES
Exterior fabrics should be cleaned with a sponge or very
soft scrub brush and a mild soap and warm water
solution. After scrubbing, rinse with plenty of cold, clean
water and allow the fabric to air dry in a well ventilated
place, preferrably away from direct sunlight.
Mildew can occur if your boat does not have adequate
ventilation. Heat alone will not prevent mildew; you must
also provide for fresh air circulation.
REFER TO THE OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
10. LIGNAPAL® CABINETS
To maintain the beauty of the galley cabinet surfaces
and to prevent using the wrong cleaning agents,
please follow the cleaning recommendations listed
below.
The following NOTICE label is placed on the fiberglass
area of the galley countertop.
NOTICE
Care and maintenance of your Vitacore® cabinets
* Never use ammoniated window sprays or
kitchen scouring components.
* Never use solvents such as acetone, gasolene,
benzene, alchohol or lacquer thinner.
* Polish with light coat of automobile paste, wax
or plastic cleaner/polish.
* failure to follow these instructions will result in
damage to your cabinets.
Na À
Clean often with a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
and water. Anon-ammoniated spray may also be used.
(Examples: Glass Cleaner-Vinegar Glass Works by
Miles, Inc.) Never use paper towels, abrasive pads or
abrasive cleaners! Hairline scratches and minor
abrasions can be removed or minimized by using mild
automobile polish, Johnson Paste or Mirror Glaze
(M.G.M.10).
These care instructions refer specifically to the Vitracore®
Cabinets surfaces. Ask your dealer about cleaning any
hardware or trim which has been incorporated in your
cabinetry.
11. CLEANING RECOMMENDATIONS
FOR MARINE HEADLINER &
FABRIC
| NOTICE
| Always clean immediately. Test an unseen area of
fabric before cleaning.
REFER TO THE OWNER'S MANUAL PACKET FOR
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
9.3
SECTION 9 * CARE & REFINISHING
THISPAGELEFTINTENTIONALLY BLANK
94
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
INDEX
A
AC & DC Electrical Schematics & Wiring
Harnesses ..................e.eeeerrercereceeee 6.18
AC System.................eecccerccccerecoeneaceeee eee. 6.7
Acrylic Plastic Sheeting .................——e—— 9.2
Additional Recommended Equipment for
Safe Operation suce 1.5
After Market Equipment Checklist ............ 8.14
After Storage, Fitting Out ....................... 8.7
Air Conditioning & Heating ......................... 7.1
A. To Start The System
Anchor Lights, Navigationand................... 2.22
Anchoring................——..-.eeeeeeeerreererenr eee 3.9
A. Anchoring Arrangement
B. Anchoring
C. Lowering the Anchor
D. Setting the Anchor
E. Weighing the Anchor
F. Clearing a Fouled Anchor
G. À Final Word
Automatic Fire Extinguisher ..................... 7.12
B
Baitwell, Live... e 7.16
Batteries ers nen 6.1
A. To Remove the Battery Cables
B. Battery Maintenance
Battery ChargerS essen EEE 6.14
A. Charging Characteristics
B. Charging Characteristics of the Bow
Thruster Battery Charger
Battery Switches and Solenoids ................. 6.3
A. Main Engine Battery Solenoids
B. Generator Solenoids
C. Bow Thruster Solenoid
D. Windlass Solenoid
Bilge Blowers….…..……..……...…..rrcrrrerecaneceneense 4.2
Bilge Layout... 4.13
Bilge PUMPS coin, 4.1
Bilge one, 4.1
A. Fuel & Oil Spillage
Bilge/Engine Compartment ........................ 9.2
A. Keep Bilge Area Dry
Boarding ................————...rererereeeriereerecenee eee 3.3
Bow Thruster ........coooieeeee iin 3.13
Bow Thruster ........coooieeeee iin 7.13
Breaker Panel, Control Station ................... 6.5
C
Cabin Layout...........................eeeiiencieneee 2.6
Canvas ..….…..............srcsreacsa area naar anna 7.16
A. Care & Maintenance
B. Storage
C. Installation Tips
Carbon Monoxide Monitors ........................ TA
A.Testing The CO Monitor
Carbon Monoxide 1.3
A. Carbon Monoxide Monitor
Care for Boats That are Moored.................. 9.1
Care for Bottom Paint ee 9.1
Central Vacuum -............... e... e... 7.15
Certification, Manufacturer'S....................—..—. IV
Chart Your Course... 1.9
Cleaning Recommendations for Marine
Headliner & Fabric 9.3
Coffee Maker ses 7.14
Communication System 7.10
A. Dockside Telephone Hookup
Contact Phone Numbers &
Internet Numbers cove. V
A. Sea Ray Boats, USA
B. Sea Ray International
C. United States Coast Guard
D. Boat US Foundation
E. Canadian Coast Guard
Control Station Breaker Panel .................... 6.5
Control Station Gauge and Switch Layout... 2.7
Control, Maintain ..................—.——.——.....__. e. 1.7
Controls, Major ............................eeeereecenas 2.12
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
INDEX
Convertible Salon Sofa .....................——.—... 7.16
Cooling System, Fresh Water ..................... 4.3
A. Coolant Recommendations
Crossover Fuel System ......................eeeee... 5.2
D
DC Breaker Panel, Main .......................——.... 6.2
DC Distribution Panel ee 6.8
DC System coool 6.1
Dealer Responsibilities I
Deck Layout, General euere 2.5
Dimensions and Clearances ...................... 2.4
Distribution System, DC ....................._.em... 6.8
Docking/Lifting/Storage ....................—....—.._.. 2.1
A. Bow and Stern Cleats
B. Supporting the Boat
E
Electrical System Fuse Blocks
a Breakers .................eeeenceccoeceereeneencence. 6.5
Electrolytic Corrosion and Zinc Anodes ....6.17
Electronics Circuit es 6.7
Emergency Situations e... 1.11
A. Medical Emergency
B. Water rescue
C. Fire
D. Flooding, Swamping á Capsizing
E. Collisions & Leaking
F. Grounding
G. Propulsion, Control or Steering Failure
Emergency Start System 6.7
Engine Exhaust System ............................. 4.4
Engine Mounts ................—.e.—..._.eeíeereeeeee 4.3
Engine Oil Exchange System ..................... 8.8
ENGINES eee, 4.3
Engines, Starting the ...................— e. .—_e_...... 3.4
Engines, Stoppong the ..................——e...—_e.=.... 3.7
Entertainment Centers 7.11
A. Salon Entertainment Center
B. Salon Entertainment Center (Optional)
C. Master Stateroom Entertainment
D. Guest Stateroom Entertainment
E. Cockpit Entertainment
F. Bridge Entertainment
G. Dockside Television Hookup
H. TV Signal Selector
Equipment Checklist, After Market............ 8.14
Equipment for Safe Operation, Additional
Recommended... 1.5
F
Fiberglass & Gelcoat ……….….…..…..…………………….……… 9.1
Fire Extinguisher, Automatic ..................... 7.12
A. Manual Fire Extinguishing System
B. Hand Held Extinguishers
Fire Extinguishing System .......................... 1.2
Fitting Out After Storage ............... eee... 8.7
A. Fuel System
B. Batteries
C. Miscellaneous
Floor Plan ..................... eee 7.18
Fresh Water Cooling System...................... 4.3
A. Coolant Recommendations
Fuel FIRers ooo, 5.2
A. Generator Fuel Filter
B. Fuel Filter Maintenance
Fuel Recommendations .....................—.—..—.—.—.. 5.2
Fuel System ….……..…..…...…..……crrrcrercsseecsa cernes 5.1
A. Fuel Tanks
B. Fuel Fill Inlet
C. Fuel Vent
Fuel System, Crossover ...................e.eeeveee. 5.2
Fueling Precautions ............... eee... 5.4
A. General
B. Before & During Fueling
C. After Fueling
Fuse Blocks & Breakers, Electrical System 6.5
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
INDEX
G
Gauge and Switch Layout, Control Station .. 2.7
Gauges, Important .........................._........ 2.16
A. Tachometer
B. Quad Gauge
C. Fuel Gauge
D. Voltmeter
E. Oil Pressure
F. Water Temperature
G. Hoursmeter
H. Magnetic Compass
|. Systems Monitor
J. Smart Craft/Smart View
K. Sea Ray Navigator (SRN)
Gears, Marine ........coooveii 4.4
C[-1- [-1(0] eee 6.13
A. Generator Operation
Generator, Starting the .............................. 3.7
Generator, Stopping the ............................ 3.8
Ground Fault Interrupter
Receptacle (GFI) coool, 6.16
A. International Receptacle
H
Halogen Lighting 6.15
A. Changing a Blown Bulb
B. AC Low Voltage Lighting
Head System ..................eeeeeeeercecrcceneeceneces 7.8
A. Requirements for Vessel Operators
B. Vacu-Flush? Head
C. Holding Tank Operation
D. Vent Filter
HOM cee, 7.16
Hotlines, Safety ......................eeeneeeveereces 1.13
Hull Identification Number (HIN) ..................... IV
Hydraulic Steering Control ........................ 4.12
I
Impaired Operation ee 1.6
Information, Source of ......................—..____.——_— li
Inspection, Service and Maintenance
Protocol... cer cn a cn ec 8.4
A. Bilge Area
B. Topside and Supplies
Inspection, Service and Maintenance,
Summary Guide for... 8.1
International Requirements ....................... 1.13
L
Layout & Accessories .....................eesvevceas 7.1
Legally Mandated Minimum Required
EquIpmMENT are eA. 1.2
Lifesaving Equipment.....................e.e.eee..... 1.4
Lighting Layout..............——..— ee... 2.26
Lignapal Cabinets 9.3
Limited Warranty ……..…..…..…..……..…rccecercscceuese Vi
Live Baitwell ............ccooiii eee. 7.16
Load Capacity ......................eeeeeervieerceceeeces 1.6
A. United States .....................eeeeeeeescceees 1.6
B. International .....................e....e.eeeeecene 1.6
Locations, Passenger ................. ee... 2.2
M
Macerator Discharge Pump with Seacock
Interlock System ...................e.eeeevcecccco. 7.10
Main DC Breaker Panel ............................. 6.2
Main Distribution Panel, Servicing the ........ 6.8
Maintain Control recrues 1.7
A. General Consideration
Maintenance & Reconditioning................... 9.1
Maintenance Log ...................ee=.e=eeeeeeereee 8.15
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
INDEX
Major Controls...................—.....eeeeeverenecens
A. Gear Shifts and Throttle Controls
B. Engine Switch Panel
C. Hydraulic Trim Tabs
Manual, This ......ccooei an unes
Manufacturer's Certification ...................
Marine Gears eur
A. Reduction Gears
B. Reverse Gears
Minimum Required Equipment, Legally
Mandated se
N
Nautical TerMS een
Navigation and Anchor Lights .................
A. Console Dimmer
О
Oil Exchange System
Operating Instructions
P
Passenger Instructions and Location ......
Passenger Locations
Personal Flotation Devices (PFD's) .......
PFD Classifications ...................eeeeee=e.e.
Power Capacity ....................e..eeeeeerece.
Power Ventilation System.......................
Preparing to Depart ....................e.eeeee....
Propulsion System
A. V-Drive Engines
Q
Quick Reference Checklist ......................... 8.9
A. Boarding The Boat
B. Preparing to Depart and After Launching
C. While Underway
D. Returning to Port
E. Securing the Boat
F. If the Engine Does Not Start
G. Operating the Generator
R
Receptacle Layout, Switch and................. 2.23
Refrigerator/Freezer ....................._.eeerccueo. 7.14
A. Bridge Ice Maker
Requirements, International ...................... 1.13
Responsibilities, Dealer ........................_...... I
Responsibilities, Your se I
Returningto Port cco eee 3.2
Rudder & Rudder Stuffing Box .................. 4.10
S
Safety Hotlines scene 1.13
Safety Labels ….….…..….....…...…….…csrerecsrcccues 1.1
Sea Ray Navigator (SBN) ........................ 2.21
Seacock Lubrication ...................... eee... 8.8
Seacocks & Strainers 4.11
Securing the Boat ce 3.2
Security Considerations 8.7
Service Information, Useful ....................—.—.... 8.3
Service, Parts and Repair for Your Boat ........ IV
Servicing the Main Distribution Panel ......... 6.8
A. To Replace a Faulty Component on
the Main Distribution Panel
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
INDEX
Shifting from Shore Power to
Generator Power .....................—...._..___.... 3.8
Shifting to Drivethe Boat............................ 3.6
Shore Power to Generator Power,
Shifting from... 3.8
Shore Power .......................... ei. 6.11
A. Isolation Transformer
B. IsoBoost Transformer
C. Glendinning Cablemaster
D. Main Shore Power Breaker Box
E. Shore Power Hookup
F. Maintenance for Shore Power Cable
Set & Shore Power Inlets
SmartCraft ….….…..…....…..….rrereressencsnecnnenes 2.21
Source oflnformation ……….…..…..…...….……………….…………. ii
7070] |[-] eee rene narn nan 2.9
Stability ee canaris 1.7
Stains & ScratcheS ernennen 9.1
Start System, Emergency …………………….…………….… 6.7
Starting the Engines …….….…..….……..…….….…………. 3.4
Starting the Generator een 3.7
Steering Control, Hydraulic ....................... 4.12
Steering System ...................e.erceecrrceceneccenas 3.9
Stopping the Engines 3.7
Stopping the Generator ……….………..…………………….…. 3.8
Stove & Microwave ire 7.14
A. Electric Stove
B. Microwave/Convection Oven
Summary Guide for Inspection, Service
and Maintenance ....................e.ee2eevevee. 8.1
Switch and Receptacle Layout ................. 2.23
T
Table of Contents ere Vil
Terms, Nautical .....................eeeenrerieriereeee 1.14
This Mana EEE Ii
Through-Hull Fittings and Cutouts ............. 2.10
Topside Areas ...................eeeeeeercecrcerceneeneeos 9.2
Twelve (12) Volt System 6.6
A. 12 Volt Accessory Receptacle
U
Underwater Gear........................eseevceiceceeo 4.6
A. Propellers
B. Shafts
C. Shaft Log & Strong Seal
D. Carrier Seal Kit
E. Strut
Upholsteries…….…..…...…..……...………rcreecrsennces 9.3
Utility Room... 7.13
V
Vacuum, Central ee 7.15
Ventilation System, Power ........................ 7.15
Vibration á Causes.................eeeneerciricerece. 4.4
A. Foreign Object Interferring with
Propeller Action
B. Bent Propeller and/or Shaft
C. Engine and Shaft Out of Alignment
D. Coupling Out of True
E. Engine Part Hitting Boat Structure
F. Other Possible Causes
W
Warning Label Locations........................... 1.15
Warranties ..................—.......eneirioreorecenee DDD. Ii
Warranty, Limited ….…..…..…..……...…..……rcrecsrceure Vi
Washer 8: Dryer.................—....eeeevrcereeercenos 7.15
Water Sports .....................eeseeerrierreireeeeas 1.10
A. Swimming
B. Skiing
C. Diving
D. In General
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
INDEX
Water System ........coooeiiiiii, 7.2
A. Water Tanks
B. Water Pumps & Filters
C. Water Pressurization
D. Water Distribution Manifold
E. Water Heater
F. Dockside Water Inlet
G. Cockpit Shower
H. Gray Water Sump
|. Fresh Water Washdown
Weather eK RAR RER 1.8
A. Ocean
B. Offshore
C. Inshore
D. Sheltered Water
While Underway ………...…..…..……….………creccrecrrccuees 3.1
LA" @ | F2 SA AA 3.12
A. To Operate From the helm
B. To Operate from the Bow
C. To Operate Manually
D. Maintenance
Winterization Checklist for Boats Stored
EEE 8.5
A. Boat Storage
B. Engines
C. Batteries
D. Head System
E. Water System
F. Fuel System
Y
Your Responsibilities res ii
Z
Zinc Anodes, Electrolytic Corrosion and ...6.17
450 Express Bridge (515 Express Bridge)
">